2018 Jeep Compass Owner's Manual

2018 Compass OWNER’S MANUAL 18MP-126-AD ©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Fourth Edition Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Printed in the U.S.A. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING The antenna cable should be as short as practical and FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this only fully shielded coaxial cable. available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design normal may require special precautions. alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body ence between the communications equipment and the portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. vehicle’s electronic systems. This connection should not be fused. WARNING! Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped. Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 1 INTRODUCTION ...... 3 2 2 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ...... 9

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...... 15 3

4 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...... 101 4

5 SAFETY ...... 135 5

6 STARTINGANDOPERATING...... 223 6

7 INCASEOFEMERGENCY...... 297 7

8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...... 363 8

9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...... 419 9

10 MULTIMEDIA...... 429 10 11 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ...... 509 11 12 INDEX...... 515 12

INTRODUCTION 1

CONTENTS INTRODUCTION ...... 4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...... 7 ROLLOVER WARNING ...... 4 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .....7 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...... 5 ▫ Essential Information ...... 5 ▫ Symbols ...... 6 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION ROLLOVER WARNING Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve- Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher distinctive styling, and high quality. ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it supplemented by Warranty Information, and various may roll over while some other vehicles may not. customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle con- enjoyable operation of your vehicle. trol. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should Drive carefully. be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold. When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction. INTRODUCTION 5 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 1 Essential Information Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up. 6 INTRODUCTION Symbols Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual: INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 1 This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau- tions.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

2 CONTENTS FRONT VIEW ...... 10 INTERIOR ...... 13 REAR VIEW...... 11 INSTRUMENT PANEL ...... 12 10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS FRONT VIEW

Front View 1 — Hood/Engine Compartment 4 — Wheels/Tires 2 — Headlights 5 — Exterior Mirrors 3 — Windshield 6 — Doors GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11 REAR VIEW

Rear View 1 — Rear Lights 2 — Rear Windshield Wiper 3 — Liftgate 12 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Panel 1 — Headlight Switch 5 — Instrument Cluster 2 — Air Vents 6 — Windshield Wiper Lever 3 — Multifunction Lever (Behind Steering Wheel) 7 — Glove Compartment 4 — Steering Wheel GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 13 INTERIOR

Interior Features 1 — Power Window Switches 5 — Climate Controls 2 — Seats 6 — Switch Panel 3 — Select Terrain Mode Knob — If Equipped 7 — Uconnect Radio 4 — Transmission Gear Selector (Automatic/Manual Options)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS 3 KEYS ...... 19 ▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation — If Equipped...... 29 ▫ KeyFob...... 19 ▫ General Information ...... 30 IGNITION SWITCH ...... 24 SENTRY KEY ...... 30 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ...... 24 ▫ Replacement Keys ...... 31 ▫ Vehicle On Message ...... 26 ▫ Customer Key Programming ...... 31 REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ...... 27 ▫ General Information ...... 31 ▫ How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped ...... 27 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .32 ▫ Remote Start Abort Message On The Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped ...... 28 ▫ Rearming Of The System ...... 32 ▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode ...... 28 ▫ To Arm The System ...... 32 ▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving ▫ To Disarm The System ...... 32 The Vehicle ...... 28 ▫ Security System Manual Override ...... 33 ▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive DOORS ...... 33 The Vehicle ...... 29 ▫ Manual Door Locks ...... 33 ▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .29 16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Power Door Locks ...... 34 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ...... 52 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry ...... 34 ▫ Electrochromic Mirror — If Equipped ...... 52 ▫ Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ...... 38 ▫ Outside Mirrors ...... 53 ▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — ▫ Power Adjustment Mirrors ...... 54 Rear Doors ...... 39 ▫ Folding Mirrors ...... 55 SEATS ...... 40 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...... 55 ▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped ...... 40 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ...... 56 ▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ...... 43 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 57 ▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped ...... 45 ▫ Headlight Switch ...... 57 ▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . .57 Feature ...... 46 ▫ Multifunction Lever ...... 58 HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 47 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch ...... 58 ▫ Front Head Restraint Adjustment ...... 47 ▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — ▫ Rear Head Restraints ...... 49 If Equipped ...... 58 STEERING WHEEL ...... 50 ▫ Flash-To-Pass ...... 59 ▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ...... 50 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 59 ▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 51 ▫ Headlight Time Delay ...... 59 MIRRORS ...... 52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17 ▫ Lights-On Reminder ...... 60 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped ...... 78 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...... 60 ▫ Operating Tips ...... 79 ▫ Turn Signals ...... 60 WINDOWS ...... 81 3 ▫ Lane Change Assist ...... 61 ▫ Power Window Controls ...... 81 ▫ Battery Saver Feature ...... 61 ▫ Auto-Down Feature ...... 82 INTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 61 ▫ Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection ....82 ▫ Interior Courtesy Lights ...... 61 ▫ Reset Auto-Up...... 83 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...... 63 ▫ Window Lockout Switch...... 83 ▫ Windshield Wiper Operation...... 63 ▫ Wind Buffeting ...... 83 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...... 65 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — ▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...... 66 IF EQUIPPED ...... 84 ▫ Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped ...... 66 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ...... 85 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...... 67 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode ...... 85 ▫ Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...... 85 Overview ...... 67 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ...... 85 ▫ Climate Controls With A Touchscreen Overview ...... 71 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express...... 85 ▫ Climate Control Functions ...... 77 ▫ Opening Power Shade — Express ...... 86 18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode ...... 86 ▫ Closing ...... 90 ▫ Closing Power Shade — Express ...... 86 ▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped ...... 90 ▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode ...... 86 ▫ Cargo Area Features ...... 92 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...... 87 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 95 ▫ Wind Buffeting ...... 87 ▫ Storage ...... 95 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...... 87 ▫ Cupholders ...... 96 HOOD ...... 87 ▫ Power Outlets ...... 97 ▫ Opening The Hood ...... 87 ▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped ...... 99 ▫ Closing The Hood ...... 88 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ...... 99 LIFTGATE ...... 89 ▫ Opening ...... 89 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19 KEYS Key Fob Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry 3 (RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped. NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.

The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and Key Fob liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) The key fob also includes an emergency key, which stores using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be in the rear of the key fob. pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking. 20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to pull the key out with your other hand. unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate. All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of the unlock button. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi- media” for further information. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated. 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer Emergency Key Removal to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor- NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key mation. into the lock cylinders with either side up. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Key Fob: Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical doors and liftgate. latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and pull the emergency key out with your other The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to 3 hand. acknowledge the signal. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” located in “Multimedia” for further programmable information. Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote Control The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery. NOTE: • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for further information. • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back Emergency Key Removal housing or the printed circuit board. 1 — Emergency Key Release Button 2 — Emergency Key 22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of the emergency key, a #2 flat blade screwdriver, or a coin and gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.

Separating Case With A Coin

Emergency Key Removal GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23 Programming Additional Key Fobs Programming the key fob may be performed by your authorized dealer. Request For Additional Key Fobs 3 NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

WARNING!

Key Fob Battery Replacement • Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — solid surface such as a table or similar and replace the Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the OFF mode. the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, Duplication of key fobs may be performed at your autho- located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with one that has never been programmed. rubbing alcohol. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System 4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to your autho- together. rized dealer. 24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE General Information The START/STOP push button ignition has three operating modes. The three modes are OFF, ON/RUN, and START. The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: NOTE: If the ignition state/mode does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite Operation is subject to the following two conditions: of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

IGNITION SWITCH Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment. START/STOP Ignition Button GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

The push button ignition can be placed in the following WARNING! (Continued) modes: could be seriously or fatally injured. Children OFF should be warned not to touch the parking brake, • The engine is stopped. brake pedal or the gear selector. 3 • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in • Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.) a location accessible to children, and do not leave the are still available. ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- ON/RUN N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate • Driving mode. power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • • Do not leave children or animals inside parked All the electrical devices are available. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may START cause serious injury or death. • Start the engine. CAUTION! WARNING! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al- • When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. NOTE: For further information, refer to Starting The • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is Engine in Starting And Operating. dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others

(Continued) 26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Vehicle On Message WARNING! (Continued) When opening the driver’s door and the ignition is in • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is ON/RUN (engine not running) mode, a chime will sound dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF mode. In could be seriously or fatally injured. Children addition to the chime, the Vehicle On message will display should be warned not to touch the parking brake, in the cluster. brake pedal or the gear selector. • NOTE: The power window switches and power sunroof (if Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in equipped) will remain active for three minutes after the a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition is cycled to the OFF mode. Opening either front ignition in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • programmable. Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may WARNING! cause serious injury or death. • Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic CAUTION! transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, place the engine in the OFF position, remove the key An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al- fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Always ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all make sure the keyless ignition is in “OFF” position, doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

(Continued) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27 REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped • Battery at an acceptable charge level • Check engine light shall not be present • Push remote start button on the key fob twice • PANIC button not pushed 3 within five seconds. Pushing the remote start button a third time shuts the engine off. • System not disabled from previous remote start event • To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, insert the key • Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing in the ignition and turn to the ON/RUN position. • Ignition in STOP/OFF position • With remote start, the engine will only run for 15 • Fuel level meets minimum requirement minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the • ON/RUN position. Vehicle security alarm is not signaling an intrusion • The vehicle must be started with the key after two WARNING! consecutive timeouts. • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or All of the following conditions must be met before the confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox- engine will remote start: ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon • Gear selector in PARK Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury • Doors closed or death when inhaled. • Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the • Hood closed Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other • Liftgate closed controls could cause serious injury or death. • Hazard switch off 28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Remote Start Abort Message On The Instrument NOTE: Cluster Display — If Equipped • If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the The following messages will display in the instrument vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits • The park lamps will turn on and remain on during remote start prematurely: Remote Start mode. • Remote Start Aborted — Door Open • For security, power window and power sunroof opera- • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low • The engine can be started two consecutive times with • Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open the key fob. However, the ignition must be cycled by • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset pushing the START/STOP button twice (or the ignition • Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. • Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The The message will stay active until the ignition is turned to Vehicle the ON/RUN position. Push and release the remote start button one time or allow To Enter Remote Start Mode the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle. Push and release the remote start button on the key fob NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the disable with a one time push of the remote start button for parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request. programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is 3 START/STOP button. If the START/STOP button is not activated. These features will stay on through the duration present, insert the key fob into the ignition switch and turn of remote start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the the switch to the ON/RUN position. ON/RUN position. NOTE: Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation • For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go — If Equipped — Passive Entry feature, the ignition switch must be in When remote start is active and the outside ambient the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle. temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield Wiper • For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting remote start will resume — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start previous operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer Active — Insert Key and Turn To Run” will show in the is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and opera- instrument cluster display until you insert the key. tion will continue. • For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will will show in the instrument cluster display until you push the START button. 30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE General Information system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key The following regulatory statement applies to all radio fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, Operation is subject to the following two conditions: the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In 2. This device must accept any interference received, includ- addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it ing interference that may cause undesired operation. indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved being shut off after two seconds. by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it SENTRY KEY indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by your The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized authorized dealer. vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. CAUTION! The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera- with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of tion. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the these systems may result in vehicle starting problems vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The and loss of security protection. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31 All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have Customer Key Programming been programmed to the vehicle electronics. Programming key fobs may be performed at your autho- Replacement Keys rized dealer. NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle General Information 3 electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The following regulatory statement applies to all radio Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: programmed to any other vehicle. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and CAUTION! with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — 2. This device must accept any interference received, in- Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in cluding interference that may cause undesired opera- the OFF position. tion.

NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at your NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming by the party responsible for compliance could void the a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob user’s authority to operate the equipment. is one that has never been programmed. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to your authorized dealer. 32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle: The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors, • hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition for Push the lock button on the interior power door lock unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is switch with the driver and/or passenger door open. armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release • Push the lock button on the key fob. are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle 3. If any doors are open, close them. security alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: To Disarm The System • The horn will pulse The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods: • The turn signals will flash • Push the unlock button on the key fob. • The vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will flash • Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to disarm the system. Rearming Of The System NOTE: If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off • The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on after approximately 90 seconds, and then the vehicle the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security security alarm will rearm itself. alarm. • To Arm The System The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm: the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the “OFF” through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will mode. sound. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33 • When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. first detent or rotate the door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden. vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously If the door lock button is locked (lock indicator visible) 3 described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle when you shut the door, the door will remain locked. security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a before closing the door. door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the vehicle security alarm. liftgate. If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will WARNING! remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior • lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, For personal security and safety in the event of a disarm the vehicle security alarm. collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and exit the vehicle. Security System Manual Override • When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped doors using the manual door lock plunger. with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, DOORS remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the Manual Door Locks vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death. To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door trim panel forward until the lock indicator is shown. To (Continued) 34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- N-Go — Ignition the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child Power Door Lock Switch could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, and any door or the liftgate is Power Door Locks open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle. Placing A power door lock switch is located on each of the front the ignition in the OFF position or closing the doors and door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the liftgate will allow the locks to operate. If the driver door is doors, liftgate and fuel door. open, and the ignition is in the RUN position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key. Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35 Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows you to To Unlock From The Driver’s Side lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to NOTE: unlock the driver’s door automatically. 3 • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time. • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm. • The key fob may not be able to be detected by the Passive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile Grab The Door Handle To Unlock phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s Passive Entry system from locking and unlocking the door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st vehicle. Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. 36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To Unlock From The Passenger Side • A lock request is made by the door panel switch while With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the the door is open. passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automati- shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a cally. Passive Entry key fob inside the car and it does not find any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then the car will NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger unlock and alert the customer. door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the follow- Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe) ing conditions are true: • The doors are manually locked using the door lock To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a knobs. Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature • There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF and within 5 ft (1.5m) of either Passive Entry door position. handle. FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry. • Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search door panel switch and then close the doors. in any passive entry vehicle: To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate • A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into while a door is open. liftgate handle release. With a valid Passive Entry key fob • A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate while a door is open. release to open with one fluid motion. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Lock The Liftgate To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located to the (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push right of liftgate handle release. the passive entry lock button located on the outside door handle, to lock the vehicle doors and liftgate. 3 NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock all doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built NOTE: DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the into the electronic liftgate release. door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location Push The Door Handle Button To Lock 38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE • If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect System, the key protection described in Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry key fob in Vehicle remains active/functional. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is dead. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel. Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if: DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking NOTE: 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled. • After pushing the door handle button, you must wait 2. All doors are closed. two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, 3. The transmission gear selector was not in PARK, then is using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to placed in PARK. allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking. 4. Any door is opened. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39 Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors NOTE: To provide a safer environment for small children riding in • When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child- opened only by using the outside door handle even Protection Door Lock system. though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position. 3 To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade • After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys- screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the lock tem, always test the door from the inside to make certain or unlock position. When the system on a door is engaged, it is in the desired position. that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle • After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position. always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position. • For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden (unlocked position), roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle.

WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Re- member that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked). Child-Protection Door Lock Function 40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more Front Seat Adjustment likely to be seriously injured or killed. While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have using a seat belt properly. reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the Manual Seats — If Equipped seat adjusters have latched. Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41

WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious 3 injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull Seat Height Adjustment upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment downward on the lever to lower the seat height. To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever. 42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Fold-Forward Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up to the instrument panel). The fold-forward seat back has a soft- back surface that you cannot use as a work surface when the seat is folded forward and the vehicle is not in motion. Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the seat. NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply Recline Lever opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat WARNING! cushion will return to its normal shape. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the WARNING! shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan- could result in serious injury or death. gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43 Power Seats — If Equipped Forward Or Rearward Adjustment Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s seat The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push and/or power passenger seat. The power seat switch and the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in power seat recliner switch are located on the outboard side the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the of the seat near the floor. Use the power seat switch to desired position has been reached. 3 adjust seat height, angle, or forward/rearward position. Height Adjustment Use the power seat recline switch to adjust the angle of the seat back. The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. Tilt Adjustment The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch and the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward. Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The Power Seat Switch seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. 44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Lumbar — If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.

Power Seat Recliner Switch WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Power Lumbar Switch GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45 Front Heated Seats — If Equipped Vehicles With Remote Start — If Equipped The front heated seats control buttons are located within On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start. buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect 3 • Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for setting on. further information. • Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting on. WARNING! • Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin heating elements off. because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- If your vehicle is equipped with automatic temperature tion or other physical condition must exercise care controls with an integrated center stack, or manual tem- when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even perature controls, you’ll find the heated seat switches on at low temperatures, especially if used for long the switch bank below the radio screen. periods of time. If the HI level setting is selected, the system will automati- • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that cally switch to LO level after approximately 60 minutes of insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. continuous operation. At that time, the display will change This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO level setting a seat that has been overheated could cause serious will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes. burns due to the increased surface temperature of the NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to seat. operate. 46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat To Lower The Rear Seat Feature 1. Pull the seatback release lever located on either side of To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be the upper outer edge of the seat. folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room. NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.

WARNING! • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Rear Seat Release Lever • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. 1 — Seatback Release Levers 2 — Seat Belt Guide • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. 2. Fold that side of the rear seatback completely forward. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47 To Raise The Rear Seat WARNING! NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the • seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty return- All occupants, including the driver, should not oper- ing the seat to its proper position. ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in 3 Raise the seatback and lock it into place. order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event The release lever will show a red indicator while in the of a crash. • unlocked position. Once the seat is locked in, the red Head restraints should never be adjusted while the indicator will no longer be visible. vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could WARNING! cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear position the seat will not provide the proper stability of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly additional clearance to the back of your head. latched seat could cause serious injury. Front Head Restraint Adjustment

HEAD RESTRAINTS Your vehicle is equipped with front four way driver and passenger head restraints. Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment head restraint is located above the top of your ear. button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. 48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of the NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as desired qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of and release. To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull the the head restraints require removal, see your authorized top of the head restraint to the forward most position and dealer. release. The head restraint will return to the rear most position. WARNING! • All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. • Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

Head Restraint Adjustment Button GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49 Rear Head Restraints The rear head restraints have two positions: up or down. When the center seat is being occupied, the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there is no occupant in the center seat, the head restraint can be lowered for 3 maximum visibility for the driver. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.

WARNING! ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.

Outboard Head Restraint Adjustment Button 50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE STEERING WHEEL To unlock the steering column, push the control handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below lock the steering column in position, push the control the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. handle upward until fully engaged.

WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

Tilt/Telescoping Lever GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped Vehicles With Remote Start — If Equipped The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to steering wheel has been turned on, it can operate for an “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa- 3 average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shut- tion. ting off. This time may vary depending on environmental temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off early WARNING! or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already • warm. Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, The heated steering wheel control button is located within spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care button through the climate screen or the controls screen. when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause • Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn burns even at low temperatures, especially if used the heating element on. for long periods. • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that • Press the heated steering wheel button a second time insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering to turn the heating element off. wheel covers of any type and material. This may NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. wheel to operate. 52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the windshield button with a counter clockwise rotation. No tools are needed for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted left and right, or tilted up and down for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the Adjusting Rearview Mirror windshield). Electrochromic Mirror — If Equipped This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the windshield button with a counter clockwise rotation. No tools are needed for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted left and right, or tilted up and down for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53 NOTE: CAUTION! • The Electrochromic Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing. To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. • The Electrochromic Mirror feature can be turned on or Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the 3 off using the button located on the mirror. When the mirror clean. LED is on, the Automatic Dimming is enabled. Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger Automatic Dimming Button side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. 54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Adjustment Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door panel. To adjust an exterior power mirror, select the right or left side using the mirror selector switch, then push the mirror adjustment switch in the desired direction indicated by the direction arrows. NOTE: • To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position.

• Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the control to the Power Mirror Switch neutral position to avoid accidental movements. 1 — Power Folding Mirror Switch 2 — Mirror Selector Switch 3 — Mirror Adjustment Switch GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55 Folding Mirrors Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has following occurs: three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rear- • The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding. ward. 3 • The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded. • The mirrors come out of the unfolded position. • The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds. To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button pushes). This resets them to their normal position. Puddle Lamps — If Equipped Located under the exterior mirrors is a small lamp that illuminates the ground when the doors are unlocked with the key fob or when the doors to the vehicle are open. Folding Exterior Mirror Heated Mirrors — If Equipped Power Folding Mirror — If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is located in the These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This power mirror switch. feature will be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing Controls” in this section for further information. the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position. 56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Illuminated Vanity Mirrors Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each sun visor. The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun. mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. 1. Fold down the sun visor. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light. 2. Unclip the visor from the center clip. 3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window. 4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun blockage. NOTE: The sun visor blade can also be extended while the sun visor is against the windshield for additional sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror Cover GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57 EXTERIOR LIGHTS Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate Headlight Switch the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation. The headlight switch is located on the left side of Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped 3 the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights, instru- is started and remain on unless the headlamps are turned ment panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights — on or the ignition is turned OFF. if equipped. NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

Headlight Switch 58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Multifunction Lever Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If Equipped The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering provides increased forward lighting at night by automat- column. ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. NOTE: • The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to Multifunction Lever remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, High/Low Beam Switch and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel • to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the multi- To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity function lever back toward the steering wheel will return Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensi- the lights to low beams. tivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59 lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition Headlight Time Delay ON. System will return to default setting upon ignition This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination off. for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your Flash-To-Pass vehicle in an unlit area. 3 You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins on, until the lever is released. when the headlight switch is turned off. Automatic Headlights — If Equipped If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay. This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for turn off in the normal manner. automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the NOTE: headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the • headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO feature. If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position position. prior to turning the ignition OFF, there is no need to turn the headlight switch to off to activate Headlight Delay. NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights • will come on in the automatic mode. The headlight delay time is programmable using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul- timedia” for further information. 60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Lights-On Reminder To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition lights or the low beam headlights and push the is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either when the driver’s door is opened. push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch. Fog Lights — If Equipped An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on. NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights. Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster display flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. NOTE: • If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is Fog Light Switch a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch. bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61 • A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru- INTERIOR LIGHTS ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound Interior Courtesy Lights if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. The interior lights come on when a door is opened. The light switches in the overhead console are for reading • When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn 3 lamps. signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on when the turn signal is turned off. Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five times then automatically turn off. Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 15 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the OFF/LOCK position. This will occur if the interior Overhead Light Switches lights were switched on manually or are on because a door To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off is open. automatically 15 minutes after the ignition is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. This includes the glove compartment light and the cargo 62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE area light. To restore interior light operation, either place Ambient Light Control — If Equipped the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward switch. to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light Instrument Panel Dimmer Control located in the overhead console, door handle lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin lights. The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the instrument panel. With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights.

Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer

Instrument Panel Dimmer GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wiper Operation The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first two detent windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the positions for intermittent settings. The first intermittent steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating wiper interval is 10 seconds. The second intermittent wipe a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on interval is based on vehicle speed. Rotate to the third 3 the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Wiper Operation” in detent for low wiper operation and the fourth detent for this section. high wiper operation.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever Windshield Wiper Operation 64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the windshield wiper blades from returning to the the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn “park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is off. turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park” position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. WARNING! • Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could • Use care when washing the inside of the rear lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind- the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the with the defroster before and during windshield heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after washer use. soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive Mist window cleaners on the interior surface of the Use this feature when weather conditions make occasional window. usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever upward to • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle. Windshield Washer Operation NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold windshield. The wash function must be used in order to while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the spray the windshield with washer fluid. intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the This feature senses rain or snow fall on the windshield and wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The following conditions: feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • Change In Ignition Position — If the vehicle is in Rain from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate Sensing mode and the ignition is cycled from OFF to 3 the end of the multifunction lever to one of two settings to ON, the auto wiper will be suppressed until vehicle activate this feature. speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the wiper switch is moved out of and back into the Intermittent The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the wipe position. multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most sensi- • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — The Rain Sens- tive. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not ing system will not operate if the NEUTRAL gear is using the system. selected in any speed unless the wiper switch is moved or the gear selector is moved out of NEUTRAL. NOTE: Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position. operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind- ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, Rain Sensing shield. wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no • Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist. may reduce Rain Sensing performance. • The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. 66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Rear Window Wiper/Washer NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the wind- switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds. Once the shield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering lever is released the pump will resume normal operation. column. The rear wiper has different operation modes: Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped • Intermittent mode Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper • In synchronous mode (at half speed of the front window De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following wiper) when the front window wiper is operating. conditions: • • Continuous mode Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of a • Vehicle in REVERSE: If the front wiper is active and the cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and REVERSE gear is selected, the wiper will turn on for one when the ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C). wipe. • Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear first detent for intermittent operation and to the defrost is turned on and when the ambient temperature second detent for continuous rear wiper operation. is below 33° F (0.6° C). To use the washer, push the lever forward and • Activation By Remote Start Operation (If Equipped) — hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed When remote start is active and the outside ambient while in the intermittent setting, the wiper will temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C), the Windshield turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after Wiper De-Icer shall be enabled. On exiting remote start the end of the lever is released, and then resume the resume previous operation except, if the Windshield intermittent interval previously selected. Wiper De-Icer timer and operation shall continue. If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67 CLIMATE CONTROLS Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen Overview The controls for the heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle can consist of a series of outer rotary dials, 3 inner push knobs, and/or a touchscreen. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.

Manual Climate Controls Climate Controls Description

Icon Description MAX A/C Setting Set the Temperature Control Knob to the MAX A/C Setting, to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. Moving the Temperature Control Knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit. A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. 68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Icon Description Recirculation Button Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. NOTE: • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging. • Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Front Defrost Setting Set the Mode Control Knob to the Front Defroster Setting, to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets when this feature is on. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Rear Defrost Button Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69

Icon Description Temperature Control Knob Temperature Control is used to regulate the temperature of the air forced through the climate system. The temperature can be selected using the temperature control knob on the faceplate. 3 The temperature increases as you turn the temperature control knob clockwise. The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature control knob counterclockwise. Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the blower control knob on the faceplate. The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. 70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Icon Description Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls 72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73 Climate Controls Description

Icon Description MAX A/C Button Press and release the MAX A/C Button in the touchscreen to change the current setting to the 3 coldest output of air. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit. A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.

Recirculation Button Press and release this button on the touchscreen or push the button on the faceplate to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. NOTE: • Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust or high humidity are present. • Recirculation can be used on all modes except Defrost. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. • Continuous use of Recirculation mode may make the air inside the cabin stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use is not recommended. AUTO Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information. 74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Icon Description Front Defrost Button Press and release the Front Defrost Button to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets when this feature is on. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting. Rear Defrost Button Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes. Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.

SYNC Button Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen (if equipped) or on the instrument panel (if equipped) to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75

Icon Description Faceplate Knobs Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to 3 manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen. Touchscreen • Buttons Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. • Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons. Modes Button — Modes Button If Equipped Push the button in the center of the Blower Control Knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. 76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Mix Mode Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77 Climate Control Functions MAX A/C A/C (Air Conditioning) MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to mance. Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys- 3 tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool is ON. dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the Pressing blower speed, temperature, recirculation, or mode cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to settings, will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit. blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select Recirculation only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes. When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, NOTE: or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if needed. The Recirculation indicator will illuminate when this but- • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than ton is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or vehicle. insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may the radiator and through the condenser. lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. 78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — NOTE: If Equipped • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for Automatic Operation cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO comfort as quickly as possible. button on the touchscreen (if equipped) on the Auto- • matic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel. The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea- 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system ture. to maintain by adjusting the temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic system achieves and automatically maintains that com- mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan remains on low fort level. until the engine warms up. The blower increases in speed and transition into Auto mode. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You experience the Manual Operation Override greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to This system offers a full complement of manual override function automatically. features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79 Operating Tips Window Fogging NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, suggested control settings for various weather conditions. and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De- frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do Summer Operation not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long 3 The engine cooling system must be protected with a periods, as fogging may occur. high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT CAUTION! coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to Winter Operation the heating elements: • To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor- Use care when washing the inside of the rear win- mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat- during Winter months is not recommended, because it may ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking cause window fogging. with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive Vacation/Storage window cleaners on the interior surface of the win- Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., dow. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. 80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Outside Air Intake Operating Tips Chart Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. Cabin Air Filter The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81 WINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. Power Window Controls The window controls will operate only when the ignition is The window controls on the driver’s door control all the in the ACC or ON/RUN position. door windows. 3 NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the power window switches will remain active for up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi- media” for further information.

WARNING! Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the Power Window Switches ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. 82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Auto-Down Feature NOTE: The driver door power window switch and the passenger • If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- door power window switches have an Auto-Down feature. closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Push the window switch down, for a short period of time, Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again and release and the window will go down automatically. to close the window. To open the window part way, push the window switch • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger down briefly and release it when you want the window to the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autostop. closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the window manually. To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. WARNING! Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is Lift the window switch up, for a short period of time, and almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear release and the window will go up automatically. your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the To stop the window from going all the way up during the window path before closing. Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly and release it when you want the window to stop. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83 Reset Auto-Up Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up: 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com- 3 pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed. 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.

Window Lockout Switch Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel Wind Buffeting allows you to disable the window controls on the rear Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. release the window lockout button (the indicator light on Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows the button with turn on). To enable the window controls, down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or push and release the window lockout button again (the partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and indicator light on the button will turn back off). can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. 84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — WARNING! IF EQUIPPED • The power sunroof switches are located between the sun Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with visors on the overhead console. access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Power Sunroof Switches Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any 1 — Power Shade Switch object, to project through the sunroof opening. In- 2 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch jury may result. 3 — Front Panel Vent Switch GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85 Opening Sunroof — Express hold the switch again, the sunroof will open to the full open position and automatically stop. Any release of the A comfort stop position and full open position are the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open posi- will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch tions. The comfort stop position has been optimized to is pushed and held again. minimize wind buffeting. 3 Push the switch and release it within one-half second. The Closing Sunroof — Express sunroof will open automatically to the comfort stop posi- Pull the switch and release it within one-half second and tion (if the sunshade is in the closed position when the the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically open sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is to the half open position prior to the sunroof opening). called “Express Close.” During Express Close operation, Push the switch and release it again, the sunroof will open any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof. to the full open position and automatically stop. This is Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. To close the sunroof, pull and hold the switch in the close position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition A comfort stop position is a programmed automatic stop until the sunroof switch is pulled again. for the sunroof open position. The comfort stop position Venting Sunroof — Express has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting. Push and release the Vent button within one-half second To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch. The and the sunroof will move from the closed position to the sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop position vent position. This is called Express Vent. During Express (if the sunshade is in the closed position when the opera- Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the tion is initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the sunroof. half open position prior to the sunroof opening). Push and 86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Push and hold the shade switch again and the shade will • If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent open automatically to the full-open position. Any release of switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle the switch will stop the movement and the shade will to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof open- remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is ing to the Vent position. pushed again. • When the sunroof is in a full open or a partial open Closing Power Shade — Express position, Express Vent operation is not available. You Pull the switch and release it within one-half second and must push and hold the vent switch to cycle the sunroof the shade will close automatically from any position. If the from a slide open position to the vent position. Sunroof sunroof is completely closed the shade will close fully and movement will stop if the switch is released prior to the stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During sunroof reaching the vent position. Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will Opening Power Shade — Express stop the shade. Push the shade switch and release it within one-half second NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the and the shade will automatically open to the halfway half-open position. Pulling the shade close button again position and stop automatically. Push the switch a second will automatically close both the sunroof and shade com- time from the halfway position and the shade will auto- pletely. matically open to the full open position and stop automati- Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop the To close the shade, pull and hold the switch in the close shade. position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode until the switch is pulled again. To open the shade, push and hold the switch. The shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open position. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87 Pinch Protect Feature Sunroof Maintenance This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction glass panel. in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc- HOOD 3 curs. Next, pull the sunroof close switch and release to Opening The Hood Express Close. Two latches must be released to open the hood. NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the 1. Pull the hood release lever located underneath the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode. driver’s side of the instrument panel. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. Hood Release Location (Underneath Instrument Panel) 88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle. The safety latch Closing The Hood release lever is located behind the front edge of the hood at the center. Reach in at the center of the hood with a WARNING! palm facing the ground. Once contact is made with the safety latch release lever, push it toward the passenger Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your side of the vehicle to fully release the hood. vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89 LIFTGATE NOTE: Use the interior door lock/unlock button on the door panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate. Opening The manual door locks on the doors and the exterior door To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate. The liftgate may be released by the overhead console 3 switch or the outside handle. WARNING! The overhead console switch will release the liftgate when Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous the liftgate is unlocked or locked. The outside handle exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passen- requires the liftgate to be unlocked. gers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.

Liftgate Entry 90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Closing Power Liftgate — If Equipped Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate reaches self The power liftgate may be opened or closed by closing position. the key fob, outside handle, overhead console switch, and the liftgate switch on the upper left trim when the liftgate is open. Using any of the above ways: • When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open. • When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close. • When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse. The key fob and the overhead console switch will open the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. Push the button on the key fob twice within five seconds to open or close the Closing Liftgate liftgate. 1 — Liftgate Pull Handle When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the NOTE: Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is possession of the key because the liftgate may be locked. enabled in the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime will be audible. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multime- dia” for further information. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91 NOTE: • There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate • Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in possession opening. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will of the key because the liftgate may be locked. cause the liftgate to return to the open position. • • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions Use the interior door lock/unlock button on the door 3 panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate. The within the same cycle, the system will automatically manual door locks on the doors and the exterior door stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be opened or closed lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate. manually. • Lock The Vehicle The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below −22° F (−30° C) or temperatures about 150° F (65° WARNING! C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate During power operation, personal injury or cargo switches. damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is • If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset before driving away. power liftgate functionality. NOTE: • Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. • The liftgate will not power open or close if the gear However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- selector is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when (0 km/h). opening the liftgate in cold weather. • • If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically re- liftgate or door open message or warning indicator. verse to the closed or open position, provided it meets Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving sufficient resistance. the liftgate open while driving. 92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE • If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle NOTE: Allow the power system to open the liftgate. in gear, the liftgate will continue to power close. How- Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the ever, vehicle movement may result in a detection of an liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power obstruction. operation or reverse its direction. • If the electronic liftgate release handle is pushed with the power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disen- WARNING! gage to allow manual operation. Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught in • If the electronic liftgate release handle is pushed while the path of the liftgate. Make sure the liftgate path is the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to clear before activating the liftgate. the full open position. Cargo Area Features WARNING! Cargo Load Floor • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas- (181 kg). sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the Cargo Load Floor Positions liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, The cargo load floor can be adjusted to three different make sure that all windows are closed, and the levels to create more space in the cargo area. These climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do positions are: upper, center, and lower. not use the recirculation mode. NOTE: The lower position is not available in vehicles equipped with either a compact spare tire, or a full size spare tire. The center position is not available in vehicles equipped with a full size spare tire. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93 To change the level of the load floor, pull upward on the Do not raise the floor beyond the point of resistance. In load floor handle, pull the floor outward, and place the vehicles equipped with a power liftgate, forcing the floor back of the floor into the desired position. Lower the front upward can damage the floor and vehicle’s trim panel. of the floor into place. 3

Raised Load Floor — (Power Liftgate) Cargo Load Floor Positions 1 — Raised Load Floor 1 — Upper Position 2 — Raised Floor Maximum Height 2 — Center Position 3 — Lower Position To fully raise the load floor, pull upward on the floor handle, pull the floor outward, then position the floor Raising The Load Floor upright with the bottom fitting on top of the floor position- To raise the load floor for access of the Tire Service Kit, or ing brackets. Push the top of the floor down firmly to spare tire (if equipped), pull upward on the load floor secure it in this position. handle. 94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! • Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers. • To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts. Fully Raised Load Floor Position The weight and position of cargo and passengers can To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han- folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle: • “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information. Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops door center pillar. • The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving. heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. • Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels. axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight

(Continued) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT WARNING! (Continued) over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to Storage sway. Glove Compartment • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of 3 the seatback. This could impair visibility or become The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident. the instrument panel.

Rear Storage Bins The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle on the sides of the load floor.

Glove Compartment To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle. Console Storage Compartment To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover. Rear Storage Bin 96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The center console armrest can also be adjusted forward Cupholders and rearward by pushing in the desired direction until it There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers, locks into place. located in the center console.

Center Console Front Cupholders The center console has a storage area which can hold cell There are two cupholders (if equipped) for the rear seat phones, PDAs, and other small items. passengers, located in the center armrest. WARNING! Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97 Power Outlets The front power outlet is located on the center stack of the instrument panel. Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a 3 “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times. NOTE: • All accessories connected to the “battery” powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against Front Power Outlet discharge. In addition to the front power outlet, there is may also be a power outlet located in the rear cargo area, if equipped. CAUTION! Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im- proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued) • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION! • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi- Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the NOTE: If equipped, the rear cargo area power outlet can be engine from starting. switched from “ignition” only to constant “battery” pow- • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, ered all the time. See an authorized dealer for details. vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and WARNING! with greater caution. • To avoid serious injury or death: After the use of high power draw accessories, or long • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces- should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a • Do not touch with wet hands. sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. (Continued) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99 Power Inverter — If Equipped The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading 3 the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.

WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric Power Inverter Location shock and failure. There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a Watts. Certain high-end game consoles will exceed this luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it should power limit, as will most power tools. be uniformly distributed over the cargo area. To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that is unplugged. the load remains securely attached. 100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at your authorized CAUTION! (Continued) dealer through Mopar parts. • Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such External racks do not increase the total load carrying as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and both the front and rear of the vehicle. luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the • Place a blanket or other protection between the luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load surface of the roof and the load. capacity. • Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. WARNING! Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is espe- vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the ve- cially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle. hicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal • injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cau- Load should always be secured to cross bars first, tions when carrying cargo on your roof rack. with tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple- mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting CAUTION! mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps • To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not frequently to be sure that the load remains securely exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always attached. distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.

(Continued) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...... 102 ▫ Yellow Warning Lights ...... 122 4 ▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions ...... 104 ▫ Yellow Indicator Lights...... 126 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...... 105 ▫ White Indicator Lights ...... 128 ▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location ▫ Green Indicator Lights ...... 129 And Controls ...... 105 ▫ Blue Indicator Lights ...... 130 ▫ Oil Change Reset ...... 107 ▫ Gray Indicator Lights ...... 130 ▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ...... 108 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .131 ▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode ▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Message — Electrical Load Reduction Cybersecurity ...... 131 Actions — If Equipped ...... 115 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE TRIP COMPUTER ...... 117 PROGRAMS ...... 132 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ...... 118 ▫ Red Warning Lights ...... 118 102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Base Instrument Cluster GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103

Premium Instrument Cluster 104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Instrument Cluster Descriptions • The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather or up mountain 1. Tachometer grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper • Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute limits of the normal operating range. (RPM x 1000). 2. Instrument Cluster Display WARNING! • The instrument cluster display features a driver- A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis- others could be badly burned by steam or boiling play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for coolant. You may want to call your authorized dealer further information. for service if your vehicle overheats. 3. Speedometer • Indicates vehicle speed. CAUTION! 4. Fuel Gauge Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam- • The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the • The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back vehicle where the fuel door is located. into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call your 5. Temperature Gauge authorized dealer for service. • The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating NOTE: The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check satisfactorily. when the ignition is first cycled. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive display, which offers useful information to the driver. With display that is located in the instrument cluster. the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument 4 cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selec- tions and adjustments. Base Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls 106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Messages • Screen Setup • Vehicle Settings The systems allow the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

Premium Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls The instrument cluster display menu items consist of the following as equipped: • Speedometer • Vehicle Info • Driver Assist Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons • Fuel Economy • Up Arrow Button • Trip Push and release the up arrow button to scroll • Stop/Start (If Equipped) upward through the main menu and submenus. • Audio GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107 • Down Arrow Button Oil Change Reset Push and release the down arrow button to scroll • Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change downward through the main menu and indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will submenus. display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next • Right Arrow Button scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change 4 Push and release the right arrow button to access indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the the information screens or submenu screens of a engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent main menu item. upon your personal driving style. • • Left Arrow Button Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. Push and release the left arrow button to access • the information screens or submenu screens of a To reset the oil change indicator after performing the main menu item. scheduled maintenance, refer to the following procedure. • OK Button Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the OK button for one second to reset displayed/ selected features that can be reset. 108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Models Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle features. Speedometer Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Speedometer Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to change the speedometer scale from MPH to km/h (or vice versa). Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Push Button Ignition Vehicle Info Menu item is displayed in the instrument 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/ button to cycle through the Vehicle Info submenus and RUN position (do not start the engine). follow the prompts on each screen as needed. 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times 1. Tire Pressure within ten seconds. • If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of 3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position. the ICON. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109 pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the Fuel Economy pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different Push and release the up or down arrow button until the color than the other tire pressure value. Fuel Economy menu title is displayed in the instrument • If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service cluster display. Push and hold the OK button to reset Tire Pressure System” is displayed. average fuel economy feature. • Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be • Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi 4 reset. or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in • Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” the tank. When the Range value is less than 30 miles under “Safety” for further information. (48 km) estimated driving distance, the Range display 2. Coolant Temperature will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the Displays the actual coolant temperature. “LOW FUEL” message and a new Range value will 3. Transmission Temperature — Automatic Transmission display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button. Only NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Displays the actual transmission temperature. loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value. 4. Oil Temperature • Displays the level of oil temperature. Average – This display shows the average fuel economy (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset. 5. Battery Voltage • Current – This display shows the current fuel economy Displays the actual battery voltage (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) while driving. 110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Driver Assist • Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset. Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Driver Assist menu title is displayed is highlighted in the Hold the OK button to reset feature information. instrument cluster display. Stop/Start – If Equipped LaneSense — If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow button until the The instrument cluster display displays the current Lane- Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster Sense system settings. The information displayed depends display. on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to Audio be met. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster Trip Info display. Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Stored Messages Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip Push and release the up or down arrow button until the A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the follow- Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument ing: cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the left or right arrow button • Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled will allow you to scroll through the stored messages. for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset. • Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel Screen Setup economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip Push and release the up or down arrow button until the B since the last reset. Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111 enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the screen • Date as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change • Time what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed. • Ignition State (default setting) • Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Range • Upper Left Fuel Economy Average — Premium Cluster 4 • • None Fuel Economy Current — Premium Cluster • Compass (default setting) Restore Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Set- tings) • Outside Temp • Yes • Date • No • Time Current Gear — If Equipped • Ignition State • On • Range • Off (default setting) • Fuel Economy Average — Premium Cluster Center • Fuel Economy Current — Premium Cluster • None Upper Right • Compass • None • Menu Title (default setting) • Compass • Date • Outside Temp 112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Outside Temp • Lights • Time • Doors and Locks • Range • Compass — If Equipped • Fuel Economy Average NOTE: Most vehicle settings will be moved into the radio • Fuel Economy Current if a touchscreen radio is present, please refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. • Audio Info Display • Trip A Distance By selecting Display, the following settings can be selected: • Trip B Distance • Language: select the language in which to display the • Speedometer information/warnings. Vehicle Settings — If Equipped • Nav. Repetition: displays information relating to the Push and release the up or down arrow button until the navigation mode. Vehicle Setup Menu item is displayed in the instrument Units cluster display. This menu item allows you to change the settings for the following: By selecting Units, the unit of measurement to use for displaying various values can be set. Possible options are: • Display • US • Units • Metric • Clock and Date • Custom: allows individual changes of units for tempera- • Security ture, distance, consumption, and tire pressure. • Safety and Assistance GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113 Clock And Date • FCW Warning (If Equipped): a selection of operating modes of the system Forward Collision Warning Plus By selecting Clock and Date, the time and date can be set. Possible options are: • FCW Sensitivity (If Equipped): a selection of the “readi- • Set Time: adjust hours/minutes ness” of intervention of the Forward Collision Warning Plus system, based on the distance to the obstacle • Set Format: adjust the time format “12h” (12 hours) or • 4 “24h” (24 hours) Rain Sensing Wipers (If Equipped): enabling/disabling the automatic operation of wipers in the event of rain • Set Date: adjust day/month/year • LaneSense Force (If Equipped): selection of the force to Security be applied to the steering wheel to put the car in the Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD): a selection of Passenger roadway through the system of electrical drive, in case Air Bag Disable (ON/OFF) may be made if a child restraint of operation of the system LaneSense must be installed in the front seat. • LaneSense Warning (If Equipped): a selection of the “readiness” of intervention of LaneSense Safety And Assistance • Buzzer Volume: There are 4 options: Off, Low, Medium, By selecting the item Safety and Assistance, the following Loud adjustments can be made: • Brake Service (If Equipped): activation of the procedure • ParkSense (If Equipped): a selection of the type of to carry out braking system maintenance information provided by ParkSense • Auto Park Brake (If Equipped): enable/disable auto • Front ParkSense Volume (If Equipped): selection of the insertion of the Electric Parking Brake volume of the beeps provided by the front ParkSense • Rear ParkSense Volume (If Equipped): selection of the volume of the beeps provided by the rear ParkSense 114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Speed Warning: Set the vehicle speed limit (km/h or • Auto High Beam (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the MPH), which the driver is notified through a visual and automatic high beam headlights acoustic signaling (display of a message and a symbol Doors And Locks on the display) • Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the Hill By selecting Doors and Locks, the following adjustments Start Assist system can be made: • Auto Lock Doors: activate/deactivate the automatic Lights locking of the doors with the vehicle moving By selecting Lights, the following adjustments can be • Auto Unlock Doors: automatic unlocking of the doors made: when exiting the vehicle • Ambient Lights (If Equipped): adjust the sensitivity of • Lights with Lock: activate the direction indicators when lighting in the doors and overhead console locking the doors • Lights Off Delay: set the delay for headlight shutoff after • Horn With Remote Lock: activate/deactivate the horn engine shutoff when pressing the lock button on the key. The options • Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of headlight are “Off”, “First Press”, and “Second Press” brightness • Horn With Remote Start (If Equipped): activate/ • Greeting Lights: activate the direction indicators when deactivate the horn at the Remote Starting of the engine unlocking the doors with the key • Daytime Lights (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the • Door Unlock: allow you to choose whether to unlock all daytime running lights the doors or only the driver’s side door on the first push • Cornering Lights (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the of the unlock button on the key cornering lights • Auto Driver Comfort (If Equipped): activate/deactivate automatic climate control during vehicle starts GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115 • Key in Memory (If Equipped): activate/deactivate memory linked to a key Compass By selecting Compass, the following settings can be changed: 4 Calibration (If Equipped) This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic, and the cluster will display dashes (- -) until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 Compass Variance Map degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — objects) until the dashes (- -) displayed in the instrument Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped cluster display turns off. The compass will now function normally. This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical Variance (If Equipped) system and status of the vehicle battery. Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or North and Geographic North. To compensate for the the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical differences, the variance should be set for the zone where load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing the compass will automatically compensate for the differ- power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads. ences and provide the most accurate compass heading. 116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. • Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel It will display a message if there is a risk of battery • Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current • Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors drive cycle. • HVAC System When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery • 150W Power Inverter System Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the • instrument cluster display. Audio and Telematics System These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate following conditions: that the charging system cannot sustain. • The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads NOTE: are larger than the capability of charging system. The • The charging system is independent from load reduc- charging system is still functioning properly. tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the • charging system continuously. Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, • If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate overloaded power outlets +12V, 150W, USB ports) dur- a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery ing certain driving conditions (city driving, towing, Charge Warning Light” in “Warning And Indicator frequent stopping). Lights And Messages” located in ”Getting To Know • Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de- The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), vices. and vehicle functions which can be effected by load reduction: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117 • Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long After a trip: parking periods). • Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad- • The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys- (weeks, months). tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents). • The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely. • Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time 4 and parking time). • The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on when the vehicle was parked. • The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the • The battery was used for an extended period with the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, help to identify the cause. +12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles and similar devices. TRIP COMPUTER What to do when an electrical load reduction action Push and release the up or down arrow button until the message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in the instrument Mode”) cluster display (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip During a trip: B). Push and release the OK button to display the Trip information. • Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: – Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior) Trip A – Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V, • Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last 150W, USB ports reset. – Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature) • Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the last – Check the audio settings (volume) reset. 118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Trip B information in this chapter in the event of a failure indica- • Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last tion. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The reset. system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell- • Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the last tales are optional and may not appear. reset. Red Warning Lights Elapsed Time — Air Bag Warning Light Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed This light indicates a fault with the air bag, and will turn on time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition or START position. is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault To Reset A Trip Function with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the Reset will only occur while a resettable function is selected fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, (highlighted). Push and hold the OK button to clear the stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system resettable function being displayed. inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. — Brake Warning Light WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES This light monitors various brake functions, including The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru- brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is indicative and precautionary and as such must not be a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are If the light remains on when the parking brake has been advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119 master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake WARNING! hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, 4 and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is repair to the ABS system is required. indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by dropped below a specified level. turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake inspected by your authorized dealer. fluid level checked. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. 120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL — Battery Charge Warning Light — Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected your authorized dealer as soon as possible. while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped or a related component. and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The — Door Open Warning Light light should turn off. If the light remains on with the This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; not fully closed. however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single NOTE: chime. This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time. — Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, This light will turn on when there’s a fault with the EPS immediate service is required and you may experience (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power Steering” reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine in “Starting And Operating” for further information. stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or WARNING! ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a the system checked by an authorized dealer. safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121 — Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will — Oil Pressure Warning Light illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the tempera- This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine ture reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will be oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool: vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime 4 whichever comes first. will sound when this light turns on. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the engine oil level must be checked under the hood. temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If — Oil Temperature Warning Light Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the further information. light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off — Hood Open Warning Light the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels. This indicator will illuminate when the hood is left open and not fully closed. — Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single This light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt chime. is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s — Liftgate Open Warning Light seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will This indicator light will illuminate when the liftgate is turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat open. belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will 122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. CAUTION! Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information. Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- — Transmission Fault Warning Light ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. This light will illuminate (together with a message in the instrument cluster display and a buzzer) to indicate a — Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 message remains after restarting the engine. seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and — Transmission Temperature Warning Light — then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. If Equipped Yellow Warning Lights This light indicates high transmission fluid temperature. — Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light This may occur with strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for turns off, you may continue to drive normally. as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then WARNING! the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function- If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans- ing and service is required as soon as possible. However, mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you the conventional brake system will continue to operate could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on. hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123 If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is — Low Coolant Level Warning Light placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer. level is low. — Electronic Park Brake Warning Light — Low Fuel Warning Light This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Depending on whether the tank size is 51L or 60L, the Low 4 Brake is not functioning properly and service is required. Fuel Indicator Light will turn on when the fuel level goes Contact an authorized dealer. below 1.5 gal (5.6L) or 1.7 gal (6.6L) respectively. — Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped — Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — This telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred, If Equipped and the system has shut the fuel off. This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer — LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped fluid is low. The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when — Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light Light (MIL) will flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker. The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped in “Starting And part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that Operating” for further information. monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition — Service LaneSense Warning Light — is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb If Equipped does not come on when turning the ignition switch from This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. operating and needs service. Please see an authorized Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor dealer. quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. 124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through — Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve- If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means hicle will drive normally and will not require towing. that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately. power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle — Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. Light — If Equipped WARNING! This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. Contact your local authorized A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced dealer for service. Refer to Forward Collision Warning above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal (FCW) in Safety for further information. operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry — Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death If Equipped or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact CAUTION! your authorized dealer for service. Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125 — Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you Warning Light should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for The warning light switches on and a message is displayed those tires.) to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom- As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or 4 may not be guaranteed. more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you above, the display will show the indications corresponding should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and to each tire in sequence. inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and CAUTION! can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling and stopping ability. handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main- occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low possible. tire pressure telltale. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc- checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one 126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This CAUTION! (Continued) sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper- indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS recommended that you take your vehicle to your au- malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked. the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels — Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light — on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning If Equipped properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to This light illuminates when there is a failure with the tow ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels hook. Contact your authorized dealer for service. allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Yellow Indicator Lights CAUTION! — Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning This light will turn on when there is a fault detected with have been established for the tire size equipped on the Active Speed Limiter. your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor — Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. (Continued) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127 If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then — 4WD Lock Indicator Light the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function- This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the ing and service is required. However, the conventional four-wheel drive LOCK mode. The front and rear drive- brake system will continue to operate normally if the brake shafts are mechanically locked together, forcing the front warning light is not on. and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in 4 as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock “Starting And Operating” for further information on four- Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition wheel drive operation and proper use. switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear drive- position. It should go out when the engine is running. If the shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition torque at the wheels. cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see “Starting And Operating” for further information on four- your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the wheel drive operation and proper use. problem diagnosed and corrected. • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. 128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi- — Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm tion, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off Indicator Light previously. This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle security alarm • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds system has detected an attempt to break into the vehicle. when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop White Indicator Lights when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. — Cruise Control Ready Indicator This telltale indicates that an ESC event is active. This light will turn on when the speed control is ready, but not set. — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped — LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the off. LaneSense indicator is solid white. This occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been detected. If a single — Forward Collision Indicator Light — lane line is detected, the system is ready to provide only If Equipped visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs This telltale will turn on to warn you of a possible collision on the detected lane line. with the vehicle in front of you. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped in “Starting And — Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light Operating” for further information. — If Equipped — Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — This light indicates that Forward Collision Warning is off. If Equipped This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129 is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is and ready to provide visual and torque warnings if an in the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met — If Equipped in “Starting And Operating” for further while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indi- information. cator light will flash on/off. — Park/Headlight On Indicator Light — Speed Control SET Indicator Light — This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or 4 If Equipped headlights are turned on. This light will turn on when the speed control is set. Refer — Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped to “Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. — Active Speed Limiter ON Indicator Light — If Equipped — Turn Signal Indicator Lights This light will turn on when the Active Speed Limiter is on, When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn but not set. signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals Green Indicator Lights can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved — Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Light down (left) or up (right). This light will turn on when the Active Speed Limiter is on NOTE: and set to a specific speed. • A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven — LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either markings have been detected and the system is “armed” indicator flashes at a rapid rate. 130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL — Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — Blue Indicator Lights If Equipped — High Beam Indicator Light This light will turn on when the speed control is set to the This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever Operating” for further information. forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the — Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward If Equipped the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode. temporary high beam on, flash to pass scenario. Gray Indicator Lights — Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If Equipped — Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light This indicator shows that the automatic high beam head- This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is lights are on. ON. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II CAUTION! (Continued) Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard • If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the severe catalytic converter damage and power loss performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans- will soon occur. Immediate service is required. mission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity 4 and fuel economy, as well as emissions well within current Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic government regulations. system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system information related to the performance of your emissions will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac- also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and your service technician in making repairs. Although your service of your vehicle and emissions system. vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. WARNING! • CAUTION! ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause order to diagnose or service your vehicle. further damage to the emission control system. It • If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests device, it may: can be performed. • Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of (Continued) (Continued) 132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING! (Continued) serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready vehicle control could occur that may result in an for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. accident involving serious injury or death. • Access, or allow others to access, information Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you stored in your vehicle systems, including personal can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your information. vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following: For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul- 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not timedia”. crank or start the engine. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to PROGRAMS start this test over. In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. (MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. For states that require an Inspection and Main- 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc- happen: tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is • not on when the engine is running, and that the The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return OBD II system is ready for testing. to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently to the I/M station. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133 • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an 4 authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

SAFETY

CONTENTS SAFETY FEATURES ...... 136 ▫ Seat Belt Systems ...... 168 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 136 ▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 181 5 ▫ Electronic Brake Control System ...... 137 ▫ Child Restraints ...... 202 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ...... 148 ▫ Transporting Pets ...... 218 ▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .148 SAFETY TIPS ...... 218 ▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With ▫ Transporting Passengers ...... 218 Mitigation — If Equipped ...... 156 ▫ Exhaust Gas ...... 219 ▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...... 159 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...... 167 The Vehicle ...... 220 ▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...... 167 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle ...... 222 ▫ Important Safety Precautions ...... 167 136 SAFETY SAFETY FEATURES These are all normal characteristics of ABS. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) WARNING! The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased • vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak- The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip- ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel ment that may be susceptible to interference caused lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause pos- The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation is working properly each time the vehicle is started and of such equipment should be performed by qualified driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight professionals. clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their ABS is activated during braking when the system detects effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa- stop. tion(s). • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak- You also may experience the following when ABS activates: ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the • The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the time after the stop). traction afforded. • • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following • Brake pedal pulsations. another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop. (Continued) SAFETY 137 Electronic Brake Control System WARNING! (Continued) • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec- could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica- (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability tion may result in degraded ABS performance. Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability 5 Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light and control in various driving conditions. The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Trailer Sway may stay on for as long as four seconds. Control (TSC), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST). If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or Traction Control System (TCS) comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of service is required. However, the conventional brake sys- the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or Brake Warning Light” is on. reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differen- If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake tial (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn- wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the ing Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. 138 SAFETY will allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel WARNING! (Continued) that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode. conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving Brake Assist System (BAS) on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa- The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys- exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of rate and amount of brake application and then applies others. optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock Brake System Warning Light brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure on for as long as four seconds. during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is functioning properly and that immediate service is re- deactivated. quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have WARNING! the light repaired as soon as possible. The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides (Continued) torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions SAFETY 139 in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to driver receives that the feature is active is the torque lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only applied to the steering wheel. reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the realize the correct course of action through small torques 5 roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles. on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity WARNING! and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important to realize that this feature will not steer the Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering and driving conditions, influence the chance that the vehicle. wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve- This function manages the distribution of the braking hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent safety of others. the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) This system enhances directional control and stability of This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed 140 SAFETY for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply- WARNING! ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En- • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, maintain the desired path. nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in- path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual cluding those resulting from excessive speed in path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro- the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate condition. driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa- • Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be appropriate for the steering wheel position. exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which • Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of appropriate for the steering wheel position. others. • Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main- The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac- in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. (Continued) SAFETY 141 ESC On WARNING! (Continued) vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle This mode should be used for most driving conditions. rollover, personal injury and death. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. ESC Operating Modes Partial Off 5 NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more ESC system may have multiple operating modes. spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck. To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off.

ESC OFF Button 142 SAFETY NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting pushing and holding the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running. allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by After five seconds, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button to enter partial illuminate and the “ESC OFF” message will appear in the mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the situation requiring instrument cluster display. “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the “limited slip” momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. This may be feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until the done while the vehicle is in motion. vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph (64 km/h), the system returns to “Partial Off” mode, as WARNING! described above. TCS remains off. When the vehicle speed • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality drops below 30 mph (48 km/h), the ESC system shuts off. of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC interfere with off-road driving however, ESC function Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction 40 mph (64 km/h). The ESC OFF Indicator Light will feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle always be illuminated when ESC is off. stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” • Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC switch. This will restore the “ESC On” mode of operation. system is in the “Partial Off” mode. NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and an Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only) audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed into the PARK position from any other position, and then This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu- message was previously cleared. verability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by SAFETY 143

WARNING! “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In the Full Off mode, the engine torque reduction and Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease stability features are disabled. In an emergency evasive up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode is intended for road conditions. off-highway or off-road use only. NOTE: 5 ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and ESC OFF Indicator Light the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is turned ON. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will Light” in the instrument cluster will come on be on even if it was turned off previously. when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds should go out with the engine running. If the when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has that caused the ESC activation. been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta- possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The 144 SAFETY Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped HDC has three states: 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate). 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application). 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed). Enabling HDC HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC: • Driveline is in 4WD Low Range. Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk) • Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h). HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in • Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released. 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while • descending hills during various driving situations. HDC Driver’s door is closed. controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes. Activating HDC Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver and can be adjusted within the thresholds by using throttle or brake application. SAFETY 145 Driver Override: • The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph (40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.) The driver may override HDC activation speed with throttle or brake application at anytime. Feedback To The Driver: Deactivating HDC The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the the state HDC is in. following conditions occur: • The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and 5 • Driver overrides HDC set speed with a speed exceeding remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is 7.5 mph (12 km/h) but remains below 25 mph the normal operating condition for HDC. (40 km/h). • The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then • Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground, or is on when enable conditions have not been met. an uphill grade. • Vehicle is shifted to PARK. The Hill Descent Switch is located within the Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right position. Disabling HDC HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the WARNING! following conditions occur: HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling • The driver pushes the HDC switch. vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is re- • The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range. sponsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. • Driver’s door opens. 146 SAFETY Hill Start Assist (HSA) • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a The system will not activate if the transmission is in complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver remain active. does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll WARNING! down the hill as normal. There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, activate: such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for • The feature must be enabled. active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s • The vehicle must be stopped. responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve- • Park brake must be off. hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under • Driver door must be closed. all road conditions. Your complete attention is always • The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in • The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction a collision or serious personal injury. (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). SAFETY 147 Towing With HSA • If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor- HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while mation. towing a trailer. Rain Brake Support (RBS) WARNING! Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in • If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated 5 with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active, trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In there is no notification to the driver and no driver interac- order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum- tion is required. ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake Ready Alert Braking (RAB) or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal. Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach • HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the full braking during emergency braking situations. It antici- parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, pates when an emergency braking situation may occur by be certain to place the transmission in PARK. monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. • Failure to follow these warnings can result in a The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop. collision or serious personal injury. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) Disabling And Enabling HSA TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati- current setting, proceed as follows: cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. 148 SAFETY NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Tow- ing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.

WARNING! Rear Detection Zones If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors load to eliminate trailer sway. to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped the vehicle is in PARK. The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar- width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to length starts at the outside mirror and extends approxi- detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, mately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both rear/front/side of the vehicle. SAFETY 149 sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches ap- The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are proximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road driver of vehicles in these areas. contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar NOTE: sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about bicycle racks, etc.) rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones. 5 • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear. It may be necessary to deactivate the BSM system manually to avoid miss-detection. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. Radar Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown) • The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi- The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- ence drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert small object remains at the side of the vehicle for present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will extended periods of time (more than a couple of sec- also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected onds). object are present on the same side at the same time, both 150 SAFETY the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the Entering From The Side audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted. Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.

Warning Light Location The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three Side Monitoring different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries. SAFETY 151 Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. 5

Rear Monitoring

Overtaking/Approaching 152 SAFETY

Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on lanes. such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle NOTE: The BSM system may experience drop outs (blink- does not require service. ing on and off) in the side mirror LED icons while a motorcycle, or any small target, remains at the vehicle’s B-pillar for an extended period of time (longer than a couple of seconds). SAFETY 153 Rear Cross Path (RCP) The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. 5

Opposing Traffic WARNING! The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal RCP Detection Zones before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the serious injury or death. vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph 154 SAFETY (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately Modes Of Operation 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. Three selectable modes of operation are available in the NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi- obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors media” for further information. are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting) not be able to alert the driver. When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, includ- mirror based on a detected object. However, when the ing reducing the radio volume. system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts WARNING! when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid alert is requested, the radio is muted. system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will injury or death. also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted. SAFETY 155 NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM blockage. After removing the blockage, reset the system by system, the radio is also muted. cycling the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON. When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with General Information both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). 5 Blind Spot Alert Off Operation is subject to the following two conditions: When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems. 2. This device must accept any interference received, in- NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating cluding interference that may cause undesired opera- mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is tion. started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the Blocked Sensor user’s authority to operate the equipment. If the system detects degraded performance due to contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in side view mirrors will be illuminated. The warning indicators will remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear the fascia area around the sensors of the 156 SAFETY Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate — If Equipped and provide additional brake force as required. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event Operation begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with miti- provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the gation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warn- warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may ing with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited brak- and then release the brakes. ing are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision. NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does not take action based upon these pro- gressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the FCW Message driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not SAFETY 157

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in WARNING! front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every NOTE: type of potential collision. The driver has the respon- • The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle (2 km/h). via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warn- • The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than ing could lead to serious injury or death. 5 vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of FCW Settings normal FCW activation and functionality. The forward collision menu setting is located in the • It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such Uconnect settings. misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events NOTE: The default status of FCW is “Full On,” this allows within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW the system to provide warning and autonomous braking in will be deactivated until the next key cycle. the event of a potential frontal collision. • The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the Changing the FCW status to “Warning Only” prevents the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be system from providing autonomous braking, or additional deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the surroundings. event of a potential frontal collision. Changing the FCW status to off deactivates the system, so no warning or autonomous braking will be available in case of a possible collision 158 SAFETY NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows remain off when the vehicle is restarted. for a more dynamic driving experience. Changing FCW Sensitivity And Operating Status NOTE: The FCW Sensitivity And Operation Settings are program- • The system will retain the last setting selected by the mable through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect driver after ignition shut down. Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. • FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over- The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and the head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path FCW is in the “Full On” setting. This allows the system to of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or front using audible/visual warnings and it applies autono- higher rate of speed. mous braking. • If FCW is disabled, unavailable screens will be dis- Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the played. system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the FCW Limited Warning vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the latter is at a farther distance than Medium setting. This If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW Limited provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible colli- Functionality” or “FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front sion. Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer. SAFETY 159 Service FCW Warning Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the reads “FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there is an driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable mended cold placard pressure. under normal conditions, have the system checked by an The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi- authorized dealer. mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that General Information when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure 5 will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not Operation is subject to the following two conditions: exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Mainte- 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. nance” for information on how to properly inflate the 2. This device must accept any interference received, in- vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the cluding interference that may cause undesired opera- vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no tion. adjustment for this increased pressure. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the by the party responsible for compliance could void the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for user’s authority to operate the equipment. any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the 160 SAFETY condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will still be NOTE: Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Monitoring System Warning Light) illuminates, you must Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light to turn off. NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off. recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off. CAUTION! The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure • Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off once the The TPMS has been optimized for the original system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph warning have been established for the tire size (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa- equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system option. eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and a poor overall system performance or sensor damage. the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a tempera- Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to assure proper TPM feature operation. approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Continued) SAFETY 161 • CAUTION! (Continued) The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain • Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be- gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle System Warning Light. to your authorized dealer to have your sensor func- • tion checked. Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the 5 reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois- tire. ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which Base System could damage the TPMS sensor. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless NOTE: technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or readings to the receiver module. condition. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to while adjusting your tire pressure. maintain the proper pressure. • Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla- The TPMS consists of the following components: tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and • Receiver Module may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors • Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light 162 SAFETY Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW can occur due to any of the following: TIRE PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in • Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to one or more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation TPMS sensors. pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to • Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. affects radio wave signals. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the • system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous- Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off. ings. • NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need Using tire chains on the vehicle. to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full Size Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off. The Spare vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare information. tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Service TPMS Warning Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the spare tire. When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Moni- toring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below SAFETY 163 the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will sound and Premium System — If Equipped the “Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light” The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will turn on technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to upon the next ignition cycle. monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System readings to the receiver module. Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire 5 then remain on solid. pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to 4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound maintain the proper pressure. and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light The TPMS consists of the following components: will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on • solid. Receiver Module • 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update which will display in the instrument cluster display. automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System • Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light Warning Light will turn off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light the TPMS to receive this information. will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a Tire Low message, an “Inflate to 164 SAFETY XX” message, and a graphic showing the pressure values or return to their original color, and the Tire Pressure of each tire with the low tire pressure values highlighted or Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off. in a different color. NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. SERVICE TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Moni- toring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a mini- Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place inflate the tires with low pressure (those highlighted or in of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being a different color in the instrument cluster display graphic) received. to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value, If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message. Once the system providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no receives the updated tire pressures, the system will auto- longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning matically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the instrument cluster will stop being highlighted SAFETY 165 Light will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYS- key cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning TEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure value Light will remain on and a chime will sound. In will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still due to any of the following: display a different color or highlighted pressure value • Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to and the “Inflate to XX” message. facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above TPMS sensors. 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System • Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and 5 affects radio wave signals. then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for • Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous- five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the ings. pressure value. • Using tire chains on the vehicle. 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display Spare a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, value. the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and spare tire. reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or 2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automati- spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below cally. In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the 166 SAFETY instrument cluster will display a new pressure value To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire Pressure up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for the TPMS to receive this information. 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel ignition cycle the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assem- no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists. blies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when General Information installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. The following regulatory statement applies to all radio To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the ve- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and hicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). will chime, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and on. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of (2) This device must accept any interference received, the pressure values. including interference that may cause undesired operation. Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” by the party responsible for compliance could void the message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will user’s authority to operate the equipment. remain in place of the pressure values. SAFETY 167 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle further information). are the restraint systems: Occupant Restraint Systems Features 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section • Seat Belt Systems for further information) should be secured in the rear • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or 5 • belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do Child Restraints not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats Some of the safety features described in this section may be should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat of a standard equipment on some models, or may be optional vehicle with a rear seat. equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho- 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind rized dealer. them or under their arm. Important Safety Precautions 5. You should read the instructions provided with your Please pay close attention to the information in this section. child restraint to make sure that you are using it It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to properly. keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul- Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the der belts properly. risk of harm from a deploying air bag: 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. to inflate. 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the 168 SAFETY 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu- worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the pants and the door and occupants could be injured. vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus- tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) information. Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) WARNING! BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Initial Indication • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first of a vehicle with a rear seat. in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen- Seat Belt Systems ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front far away from home or on your own street. SAFETY 169 seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck- seat is unoccupied. led again. BeltAlert Warning Sequence The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck- are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when 5 led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet not active when the outboard front passenger seat is harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by cargo is properly stowed. blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho- intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivat- has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on ing BeltAlert. until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning NOTE: sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt to buckle their seat belts. Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. Change of Status Lap/Shoulder Belts If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles lap/shoulder belts. 170 SAFETY

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very WARNING! (Continued) sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder • part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal Do not allow people to ride in any area of your conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and being thrown out of the vehicle. using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether WARNING! or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more death in the event of a crash. severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled • Two people should never be belted into a single seat up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or belt. People belted together can crash into one another passengers, or you can be thrown out of the other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one vehicle are buckled up properly. person, no matter what their size. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

(Continued) SAFETY 171

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that as low as possible and keep it snug. your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In 5 a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat you from injury during a collision. You are more belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. your authorized dealer immediately and have it • fixed. A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or too high on your body, possibly causing internal loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme- injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt buckle nearest you. system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you collision. properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. the seat. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles (Continued) 172 SAFETY equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen Pulling Out The Latch Plate the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” sliding under the seat belt in a collision. SAFETY 173 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees 5 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. Positioning The Lap Belt The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. any slack in the shoulder belt. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best. 174 SAFETY NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.

WARNING! • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the Adjustable Anchorage seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you • Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort- anchorage in a higher position. After you release the able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. that it is locked in position. • Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SAFETY 175 Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions 2. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the The second row center seat belt may feature a seat belt with mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a a mini-latch plate and buckle. The mini-latch plate and “click.” buckle, if equipped, should remain connected at all times. If the mini-latch plate and buckle become disconnected, they must be properly reconnected prior to the rear center seat belt being used by an occupant. 5 1. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the seat.

Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle

Pulling Out The Latch Plate 176 SAFETY 3. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. 4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 5. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle a collision. 6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt. 7. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. SAFETY 177

8. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle, WARNING! insert the regular latch plate into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. • If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision. • When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini- 5 buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini- buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini- latch plate and mini-buckle.

Seat Belt Extender Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed. 178 SAFETY Seat Belts And Pregnant Women WARNING! • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. Pregnant Women And Seat Belts Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. SAFETY 179 Seat Belt Pretensioner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” occupants, including those in child restraints. section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position. 5 NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Energy Management Feature The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor a controlled manner. If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the 180 SAFETY ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu- 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle the entire seat belt is extracted. until you hear a click. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati- you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to years old and under should always be properly restrained retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING! WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea- cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or ture or any other seat belt function is not working younger, including a child in a rear-facing child properly when checked according to the procedures restraint. in the Service Manual. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in- of a vehicle with a rear seat. crease the risk of injury in collisions.

(Continued) SAFETY 181 Air Bag System Components WARNING! (Continued) • • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children • Air Bag Warning Light who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only • Steering Wheel and Column used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the • Instrument Panel child. • Knee Impact Bolsters 5 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Some of the safety features described in this section may be • Seat Belt Buckle Switch standard equipment on some models, or may be optional • Supplemental Side Air Bags equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho- • rized dealer. Supplemental Knee Air Bags • The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a Front and Side Impact Sensors collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni- • Seat Belt Pretensioners tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso- • Seat Track Position Sensors ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag • Occupant Classification System System Components: 182 SAFETY Air Bag Warning Light bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition bag system immediately. switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags the ON/RUN position. will not inflate. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may eight-second interval. deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. remains on while driving. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn- the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning immediately. Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after WARNING! initial startup. Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air (Continued) SAFETY 183 Front Air Bags WARNING! (Continued) This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. system immediately. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIR- Redundant Air Bag Warning Light BAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers. 5 If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations manual. 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag 184 SAFETY

WARNING! The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy panel during front air bag deployment could cause output is used for more severe collisions. serious injury, including death. Air bags need room This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad- air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can vanced Front Air Bags. cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front restraint. passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon of a vehicle with a rear seat. seat position.

Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed to The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appro- and front passenger air bags. This system provides output priate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as determined appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter- by the OCS. mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components. SAFETY 185

WARNING! frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli- • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. on the instrument panel or steering wheel because On the other hand, depending on the type and location of any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial inflate. • deceleration. Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers 5 or attempt to open them manually. You may damage Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over the air bags and you could be injured because the air time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not bags may no longer be functional. The protective good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open deployed. only when the air bags are inflating. • Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more and also are needed to help keep you in position, away severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with from an inflating air bag. your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air your seat belts even though you have air bags. bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags. Front Air Bag Operation The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen- Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec- ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. 186 SAFETY Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front probable classification. The OCM communicates this infor- Passenger Seat mation to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for based on occupant classification. In order for the OCS to this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. weight, as determined by the OCS. The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation following: rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) estimates that: • Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor lo- • The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light cated in the front passenger seat objects on it; or • Air Bag Warning Light • The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passen- Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor ger, including a child; or • The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located child restraint; or beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on • The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time. from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most SAFETY 187

Front Passenger Seat Front Passenger Air Bag WARNING! Occupant Status Output • Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deploy- Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an ment air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or Child, including a child in Reduced-power deploy- younger, including a child in a rear-facing child a forward-facing child re- ment OR Full-power de- restraint. straint or booster seat* ployment • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat 5 Properly seated adult Full-power deployment of a vehicle with a rear seat. OR reduced-power de- • Children 12 years or younger should always ride ployment buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deploy- seat. ment The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable * It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC. passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passen- Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be ger seat. adjusted. 188 SAFETY In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults) for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are: occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the • Sitting upright inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. • Facing forward This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. • Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort- Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated ably on or near the floor weight on the front passenger seat • Sitting with their back against the seatback and the The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly seatback in an upright position positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Seated Properly SAFETY 189 Examples of improper front passenger seating include: The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable • The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output panel). signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example: • The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle. • The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright 5 position. • The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.). • Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat. • Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and center console. • Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger Not Seated Properly seat. • Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger’s seated weight. 190 SAFETY

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly SAFETY 191

WARNING! (Continued) the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor. • Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop- 5 erly seated weight input, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. • Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working Not Seated Properly properly, which may result in serious injury or death WARNING! in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat. • If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp- The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop- front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS erly seated weight input. This may result in serious may affect the operation of the air bag system. injury or death in a collision. If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or • Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you seatback in an upright position, your back against drive, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for (Continued) service immediately. 192 SAFETY The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS compo- be modified or replaced with any part except those nents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front Air which are approved by FCA US LLC. Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS compo- WARNING! nents must function as designed. Do not make any modi- • fications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, Unapproved modifications or service procedures to or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs the passenger seat assembly, its related components, service for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This be used. could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A The following requirements must be strictly followed: modified vehicle may not comply with required • Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) components in any way. and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS). • Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or • If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific persons with disabilities, contact your authorized model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover dealer. and cushion specified for the vehicle. • Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an Knee Impact Bolsters aftermarket seat cover or cushion. The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the • Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags. • At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener SAFETY 193

WARNING! The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body bolsters in any way. structure. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. 5 Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags. Supplemental Side Air Bags Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys Side Air Bags (SABs). through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. 194 SAFETY area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING! Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) Label Location are located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are SAFETY 195 positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children Side Impacts are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side bag. impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter- The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever- certain side impact events. ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact WARNING! events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags 5 on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that • Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo- deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by cated should remain free from any obstructions. itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air • In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not Bags should have deployed. install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that including some collisions at certain angles, or some side require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during roof of the vehicle for any reason. angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy. 196 SAFETY

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint WARNING! system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center WARNING! of the seat. • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy- • Occupants, including children, who are up against or ment could cause you to be severely injured or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured killed. or killed. Occupants, including children, should • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to never lean on or sleep against the door, side win- more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In they are in an infant or child restraint. some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. • Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) Always wear your seat belt even though you have are necessary for your protection in all collisions. Side Air Bags. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly re- Rollover Events strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover appropriate for the size of the child. events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. SAFETY 197 The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The • Supplemental Side Air Bags rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may • Supplemental Knee Air Bags be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover • Front and Side Impact Sensors event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, • Seat Belt Pretensioners the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt • pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. Seat Track Position Sensors • Occupant Classification System The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete 5 ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in If A Deployment Occurs certain rollover or side impact events. The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after Air Bag System Components deployment. NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below: air bag system. • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any • Air Bag Warning Light or all of the following may occur: • • Steering Wheel and Column The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags • Instrument Panel deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction • Knee Impact Bolsters rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal • Seat Belt Buckle Switch 198 SAFETY

quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly WARNING! (Continued) within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well. • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the NOTE: process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, but they will open during air bag deployment. eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, authorized dealer immediately. see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, Enhanced Accident Response System follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform not be in place to protect you. the following functions: • WARNING! Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped) • Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped) Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot • protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.

(Continued) SAFETY 199 • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys- the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully tem. check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment • Unlock the power door locks. and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system 5 Response System: by following the procedure described below. • Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door Procedure • Cut off battery power to the: After the event occurs, when the system is active, a • Engine message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the igni- • Electric Motor (if equipped) tion switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ • Electric power steering ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on • Brake booster • the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank Electric park brake before resetting the system and starting the engine. • Automatic transmission gear selector Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn • Horn • signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be Front wiper blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your • Headlamp washer pump vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure. 200 SAFETY

Customer Action Customer Will See Customer Action Customer Will See NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two sec- NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds onds 1. Turn ignition STOP/ 8. Place turn signal in Right turn light is OFF. OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Switch Must be placed in 9. Turn left turn signal Right turn light is ON Neutral State). switch ON. SOLID. 2. Turn ignition MAR/ Right turn light BLINKS. Left turn light is ON ACC/ON/RUN. Left turn light is OFF. SOLID. 3. Turn right turn signal Right turn light is ON 10. Turn left turn signal Right turn light is OFF. switch ON. SOLID. switch OFF. (Turn Signal Left turn light is OFF. Left turn light BLINKS. Switch Must be placed in 4. Place turn signal in Right turn light is OFF. Neutral State). neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. 11. Turn ignition STOP/ 5. Turn left turn signal Right turn light BLINKS. OFF/LOCK. switch ON. Left turn light is ON 12. Turn ignition MAR/ System is now reset and SOLID. ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire the engine may be started. 6. Place turn signal in Right turn light BLINKS. sequence needs to be neutral state. Left turn light is OFF. completed within one 7. Turn right turn signal Right turn light is ON minute or sequence will switch ON. SOLID. need to be repeated). Left turn light BLINKS. Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually). SAFETY 201

If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, WARNING! (Continued) then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful. cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat Maintaining Your Air Bag System attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories WARNING! may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag • system for persons with disabilities, contact your Modifications to any part of the air bag system could 5 cause it to fail when you need it. You could be authorized dealer. injured if the air bag system is not there to protect Event Data Recorder (EDR) you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist side steps or running boards. in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 your vehicle that it has an air bag system. seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag record such data as: system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; not function properly if modifications are made. • Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts bag system service. If your seat, including your trim were buckled/fastened;

(Continued) 202 SAFETY • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel- Child Restraints erator and/or brake pedal; and, Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all • How fast the vehicle was traveling. times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that These data can help provide a better understanding of the small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal children are safer when properly restrained in the rear data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are seats rather than in the front. recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally WARNING! identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In even an infant on your lap could become so great that addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read are. The child and others could be badly injured or the information if they have access to the vehicle or the killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a EDR. proper restraint for the child’s size. SAFETY 203 There are different sizes and types of restraints for children NOTE: from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an • For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/ adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236 Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your • child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and Canadian residents should refer to Transport warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all Canada’s website for additional information: http:// the labels attached to the child restraint. www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers- childsafety-index-53.htm Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a 5 label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan- dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Recommended Type Of Child Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert- younger and who have not reached ible Child Restraint, facing rearward the height or weight limits of their in the rear seat of the vehicle child restraint Small Children Children who are at least two years Forward-Facing Child Restraint with old or who have outgrown the a five-point Harness, facing forward height or weight limit of their rear- in the rear seat of the vehicle facing child restraint 204 SAFETY

Recommended Type Of Child Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Restraint Larger Children Children who have outgrown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the forward-facing child restraint, but vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear are too small to properly fit the vehi- seat of the vehicle cle’s seat belt Children Too Large for Child Children 12 years old or younger, Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear Restraints who have outgrown the height or seat of the vehicle weight limit of their booster seat Infant And Child Restraints two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach convertible child seat. either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear- WARNING! facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can is recommended for children from birth until they reach cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible younger, including a child in a rear-facing child child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing restraint. • in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers of a vehicle with a rear seat. do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least SAFETY 205 Older Children And Child Restraints WARNING! Children who are two years old or who have outgrown • their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward- Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con- or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow for children who are over two years old or who have the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their when installing an infant or child restraint. • rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do 5 in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be- possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments. child seat. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been All children whose weight or height is above the forward- adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the personal injury. seat belt. 206 SAFETY Children Too Large For Booster Seats 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of belt alone: position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a vehicle seat? booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of WARNING! the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way back? Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be- will not protect a child properly, which may result in tween their neck and arm? serious injury or death. A child must always wear both 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. child’s thighs and not the stomach? SAFETY 207 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Weight of the LATCH – Lower Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Child + Child Anchors Only Anchors + Top Tether Anchor Restraint Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs XX Child Restraint (29.5 kg) 5 Rear-Facing More than 65 lbs X Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs XX Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing More than 65 lbs X Child Restraint (29.5 kg) 208 SAFETY Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) used with the top tether anchorage to install the child Restraint System restraint. Please see the following table for more information. LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

LATCH Label Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top LATCH Positions tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These • Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats Seating Position) without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi- • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be SAFETY 209

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the weight of the child restraint) for using the combined weight of the child and the child LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt restraint? and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt No Do not use the seat belt when you use the 5 be used together to attach a rear-facing or LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear- forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint. Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Can a child seat be installed in the center po- Yes You can install child restraints with flexible sition using the inner LATCH lower anchor- lower anchors in the center position. The in- ages? ner anchorages are 16 inches (400 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position. 210 SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Can two child restraints be attached using a No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two common lower LATCH anchorage? or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes The child seat may touch the back of the back of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints may be removed in every rear seating position. SAFETY 211 Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are There are tether strap anchorages behind each found at the rear of the seat cushion where it rear seating position located on the back of the meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym- seat. bols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap 5 between the seatback and seat cushion.

Tether Anchorage Locations LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower Lower Anchorage Location anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear- facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether 212 SAFETY strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic after it is attached to the anchorage. Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, Center Seat LATCH following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments type of seat belt each seating position has. in the center seating position. Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily installed in any rear seating position. attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. WARNING! 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more that seating position. For some second row seats, you than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH- may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head compatible child restraints next to each other, you must restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved use the seat belt for the center position. You can then forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt move it to its rear-most position to make room for the for installing child seats in the outboard positions. child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible allow more room for the child seat. Child Restraint System” for typical installation in- 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child structions. restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. SAFETY 213 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- that they should not play with them. tions to attach a tether anchor. WARNING! 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in • Improper installation of a child restraint to the the straps according to the child restraint manufactur- LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re- er’s instructions. straint. The child could be badly injured or killed. 5 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand direction. only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching Seat Belt: other items or equipment to the vehicle. When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by Belt other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat lap/shoulder belt. belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt 214 SAFETY Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child WARNING! Restraints In This Vehicle • Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into • the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information on ALR. Please see the table below and the following sections for more information. SAFETY 215

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when weight + weight of the child re- using the seat belt to install a for- straint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to the with the seat belt to attach a forward recommended weight limit of the facing child restraint? child restraint. Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passenger touch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is al- 5 seat? lowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints can be removed in every seating position. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a tighten the seat belt against the belt seating position with an ALR retrac- path of the child restraint? tor. Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable WARNING! Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): • Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in Improper installation or failure to properly secure a vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The lap/shoulder belt. child could be badly injured or killed. • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 216 SAFETY 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is For some second row seats, you may need to recline the locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most portion around the child restraint while you push the position to make room for the child seat. You may also child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle move the front seat forward to allow more room for the seat. child seat. 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a “click.” tether anchor. 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling against the child seat. back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of direction. the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. SAFETY 217 Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to Anchorage: install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide WARNING! better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is any location in front of the car seat, including the seat available. frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for 5 that is approved for that seating position, located the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the Restraint System” for the location of approved tether tether strap under the head restraint and between the anchorages in your vehicle. two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 218 SAFETY Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO Rear Seat Tether Anchors AREA. WARNING! WARNING! • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to • increased head motion and possible injury to the Do not leave children or animals inside parked child. Use only the anchorage position directly be- vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top cause serious injury or death. • tether strap. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people make sure the tether strap does not slip into the riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack injured or killed. in the strap. (Continued) SAFETY 219

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts. engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con- • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the using a seat belt properly. blower at high speed.

Exhaust Gas The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust 5 WARNING! system. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even- vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete these safety tips: exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam- • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or confined areas any longer than needed to move your loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into vehicle in or out of the area. the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex- • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication rear doors open, make sure that all windows are or oil change. Replace as required. closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

(Continued) 220 SAFETY Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Defroster Seat Belts Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced for service if your defroster is inoperable. immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Floor Mat Safety Information Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat retractor condition, replace the seat belt. that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera- Air Bag Warning Light tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to vehicle in other ways. eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on WARNING! during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or • ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the remains on while driving, have your authorized dealer floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information. (Continued) SAFETY 221

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull • ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten- passenger’s side floor area. ers on a regular basis. • ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into • ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera- floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of 5 mat on top of an existing floor mat. vehicle control. • ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. • NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat position of the floor mat and may cause interference needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. mat for the specific make, model, and year of your • If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re- vehicle. installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor • ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your • It is recommended to only use mild soap and water floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat your floor mat has been properly installed and is from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners trunk. by lightly pulling mat.

(Continued) 222 SAFETY Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately. STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 226 ▫ Downshifting...... 239 ▫ Normal Starting ...... 226 ▫ Parking ...... 241 ▫ Cold Weather Operation AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ...... 228 IF EQUIPPED ...... 241 6 ▫ Extended Park Starting ...... 228 ▫ Ignition Park Interlock ...... 243 ▫ After Starting — Warming Up The Engine .....229 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .243 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start ...... 229 ▫ Six-Speed Or Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ...... 243 ▫ Stopping The Engine ...... 230 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .230 IF EQUIPPED ...... 251 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .231 ▫ Jeep Active Drive ...... 251 PARK BRAKE ...... 232 SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED...... 253 ▫ Electric Park Brake (EPB) ...... 232 ▫ Mode Selection Guide...... 253 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . .237 POWER STEERING...... 255 ▫ Shifting ...... 238 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED...... 256 224 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Automatic Mode ...... 256 ▫ ParkSense Display ...... 262 ▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not ▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ...... 266 Autostop ...... 256 ▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .266 ▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . . .257 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System...... 266 ▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .258 ▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions ...... 267 ▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . .258 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ...... 268 ▫ System Malfunction ...... 258 ▫ LaneSense Operation ...... 268 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ...... 259 ▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...... 269 ▫ To Activate ...... 259 ▫ LaneSense Warning Message ...... 270 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed...... 260 ▫ Changing LaneSense Status...... 275 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...... 260 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...... 275 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...... 261 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 277 ▫ To Resume Speed ...... 261 VEHICLE LOADING ...... 279 ▫ To Deactivate ...... 261 ▫ Certification Label ...... 279 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — TRAILER TOWING ...... 281 IF EQUIPPED ...... 261 ▫ Common Towing Definitions...... 281 ▫ ParkSense Sensors ...... 262 ▫ ParkSense Warning Display...... 262 STARTING AND OPERATING 225 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight ▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Ratings) ...... 283 Models ...... 290 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...... 284 ▫ Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models ...... 291 ▫ Towing Requirements ...... 285 DRIVING TIPS ...... 291 ▫ Towing Tips ...... 289 ▫ On-Road Driving Tips ...... 291 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND ▫ Off-Road Driving Tips ...... 292 MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...... 290 6 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .290 226 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING THE ENGINE Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. driving range. Normal Starting WARNING! NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine • When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. pedal. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release access to an unlocked vehicle. when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF posi- dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal could be seriously or fatally injured. Children Starting” procedure. should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. Tip Start Feature • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it a location accessible to children, and do not leave the as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- continue to run, and will automatically disengage itself N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, cycle operate power windows, other controls, or move the the ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 sec- vehicle. onds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. STARTING AND OPERATING 227 Automatic Transmission 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes automatically after 10 seconds. before shifting into any driving gear. 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again. CAUTION! NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine Damage to the transmission may occur if the following is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator precautions are not observed: pedal. • 6 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, Keyless Enter-N-Go — With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, RUN, and firmly on the brake pedal. START. To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — Using The ENGINE steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position: START/STOP Button 1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. the ignition switch to the RUN position, 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time ENGINE START/STOP button once. to change the ignition switch to the OFF position, 228 STARTING AND OPERATING Manual Transmission Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position before Position) you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear. The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — Using The ENGINE ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, RUN, and START/STOP Button START. To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these 1. The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position: 2. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pushing the 1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change ENGINE START/STOP button once. the ignition switch to the RUN position, 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage to change the ignition switch to the OFF position, automatically after 10 seconds. Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C) 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an the engine starting, push the button again. externally powered electric engine block heater (available NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine from your authorized dealer) is recommended. is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator Extended Park Starting pedal. NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days. 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle. STARTING AND OPERATING 229 2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor when the engine starts. and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the 3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the RUN ignition to the OFF position, wait five seconds to allow position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Nor- the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park mal Starting” procedure. Starting procedure. 4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the CAUTION! starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the procedure. To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously 6 crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. CAUTION! Wait 60 seconds before trying again.

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continu- WARNING! ously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start After Starting — Warming Up The Engine the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will serious personal injury. • decrease as the engine warms up. Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans- If Engine Fails To Start mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel If the engine fails to start after you have followed the could enter the catalytic converter and once the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedure, and has not experienced an extended park condition as (Continued) identified in Extended Park Starting procedure it may be 230 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued) Opening the driver side door with the ignition in RUN will sound a short chime that reminds the driver to place the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter ignition to STOP. and vehicle. • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position, the win- may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery dow switches remains active for three minutes. Opening a or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start front door will cancel this function. can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the tempera- Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for ture inside the engine compartment to cool before shutting further information. off the engine.

Stopping The Engine ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key (Keyless Enter- The engine block heater warms the engine and permits N-Go): quicker starts in cold weather. To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or a grounded, three-wire extension cord. push the START/STOP button three times consecutively within a few seconds. The engine will shut down, and the For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine ignition will be placed in the RUN position. block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required. Turning Off the car (placing the ignition from the RUN position to the STOP position), the power supply to the accessories are maintained for a period of three minutes. STARTING AND OPERATING 231

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood, WARNING! behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps below to properly use the engine block heater: Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord 1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical side headlamp). cord could cause electrocution. 2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS place. A long break-in period is not required for the engine and 3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. 6 a grounded, three-wire extension cord. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After 4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 Velcro strap, and properly stow away behind the driv- or 90 km/h) are desirable. er’s side headlamp. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the NOTE: limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. • The engine block heater cord is a factory installed Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are mental and should be avoided. available from your authorized Mopar dealer. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a • The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element. should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions • under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom- The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”. 232 STARTING AND OPERATING • CAUTION! Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature in the customer programmable features section of the Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil Uconnect settings. in the engine or damage may result. The park brake switch is located in the center console. NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.

PARK BRAKE Electric Park Brake (EPB) Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some additional features that make the parking brake more convenient and useful. The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the Electric Park Brake Switch vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from certain to leave the transmission in PARK. the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages. Once the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp You can engage the park brake in two ways: in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch • Manually, by applying the park brake switch. will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply the park brake, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake can be applied STARTING AND OPERATING 233 even when the ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE pedal. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp will not illuminate, however, it can only be warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED released when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN indicator on the switch will extinguish. position. NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and switch is held for longer than 60 seconds in either the away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park released or applied position. The light will extinguish upon brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise releasing the switch. the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake 6 will automatically engage whenever the transmission is parking brake should always be applied whenever the placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission, when driver is not in the vehicle. the ignition switch is turned OFF. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal WARNING! movement while the park brake is engaging. • Do not rely on the parking brake to operate effec- The park brake will release automatically when the igni- tively if the rear brakes have been immersed in water tion switch is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or RE- or mud. VERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the made to drive away. parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch possible injury or damage. must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot on the • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob brake pedal, then push the park brake switch down from the ignition and lock your vehicle. momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the car while the parking brake disengages. You (Continued) may also notice a small amount of movement in the brake 234 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au- of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or thorized dealer immediately. fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to selector. engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion, • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake a location accessible to children, and do not leave the switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime will N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated auto- operate power windows, other controls, or move the matically while the vehicle remains in motion. vehicle. To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion, • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle reaches a collision. approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving remain engaged. your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. STARTING AND OPERATING 235

WARNING! transmission is placed in PARK (automatic transmission) and the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or SafeHold repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system; failure SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition switch is in ON/RUN. In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are met: may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp flash- 6 ing. In this event, urgent service of the electric park brake • Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h). system is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to • There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or hold the vehicle stationary. accelerator pedal. Auto Park Brake • The seat belt is unbuckled. The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically • The driver door is open. whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and • the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a The vehicle is not in the PARK position. manual transmission, whenever the ignition switch is in For manual transmissions, the EPB will automatically the OFF position. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled engage if all of the following conditions are met: by customer selection through the Customer Program- • Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h). mable Features section of the Uconnect Settings. • There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed accelerator pedal. by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the • The clutch pedal is not pressed. 236 STARTING AND OPERATING • The seat belt is unbuckled. Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order to be activated: • The driver door is open. • The vehicle must be at a standstill. SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the EPB Switch while the driver door is open and the brake pedal is • The parking brake must be disabled. pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be en- • The transmission must be in park or neutral. abled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or • the ignition is turned to the OFF position and back to The EPB switch not activated. ON/RUN again. • The vehicle in ignition ON/RUN position. Brake Service Mode • The brake pedal not pressed. We recommend having your brakes serviced by your While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which continuously while the ignition switch is ON/RUN. you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You NOTE: should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake ser- A dedicated message will appear in the instrument vice. cluster display if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated. When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for When brake service work is complete, the following steps you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear must be followed to reset the parking brake system to caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this can normal operation: only be done after retracting the EPB actuator. The actuator • Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. retraction can be done easily by entering the Brake Service • Press the brake pedal with moderate force. Mode through the Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This • menu based system will guide you through the steps Apply the EPB Switch. necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake service. STARTING AND OPERATING 237 NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the instrument CAUTION! cluster display if Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated. Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch WARNING! pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch. You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in- have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms have any doubt about your ability to perform a service up. This is normal. 6 job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the park brake fully applied. The park brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline.

Gear Selector 238 STARTING AND OPERATING To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place the Shifting gear selector into the desired gear position (the diagram for Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle of release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. the selector). You should always use first gear when starting from a To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift standing position. the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the gear selector all the way left and then forward. Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply.

Shift Pattern STARTING AND OPERATING 239

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) All Engines Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6 Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90) Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66) NOTE: A certain amount of noise from the transmission is WARNING! normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their 6 noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is grip, and the vehicle could skid. warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission. CAUTION! Downshifting • Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recom- higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and mended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills. clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower gear In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the releasing the clutch may result in engine damage. engine and clutch. • When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer

(Continued) 240 STARTING AND OPERATING Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds CAUTION! (Continued) case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause CAUTION! engine and clutch damage are significantly lower. • Failure to follow the maximum recommended down- Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage and/or shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal pressed. is pressed. • Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal depressed could result in clutch damage.

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1 Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)

CAUTION! If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed (i.e., not released). STARTING AND OPERATING 241 Parking AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED When parking and leaving the vehicle, proceed as follows: WARNING! • Engage a gear (first gear if facing uphill or reverse if facing downhill) and leave the wheels turned. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the park brake. Always apply the park brake fully when • Stop the engine and engage the park brake. exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move- • Always remove the key fob. ment and possible injury or damage. • • Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the vehicle Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if is parked on a steep slope. it is not in PARK. Check by WARNING! trying to 6 move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake NOTE: NEVER leave the car with the gearbox in neutral pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in (or, if equipped with automatic transmission, before plac- PARK before exiting the vehicle. ing the gear lever in PARK). • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your WARNING! foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Al- verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit ways remove the key fob when exiting the vehicle and someone or something. Only shift into gear when the take it with you. engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear if the vehicle is moving while shifting.

(Continued) 242 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you a location accessible to children), and do not leave should never exit a vehicle while the engine is the ignition in the ON/RUN mode. A child could running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a operate power windows, other controls, or move the complete stop, then apply the park brake, shift the vehicle. transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmis- CAUTION! sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Damage to the transmission may occur if the following • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the precautions are not observed: ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or firmly pressing the brake pedal. fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or the transmis- NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while sion gear selector. shifting out of PARK.

(Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 243 Ignition Park Interlock The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE range for normal the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the driving. OFF mode. NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System 6 selector position and the actual transmission gear (for This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift example, driver selects REVERSE while driving forward), Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear the position indicator will blink continuously until the selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the shift can be completed. ON/RUN mode (whether the engine is running or not), The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self- REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle speeds. may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and Six-Speed Or Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a six-speed or (kilometers). nine-speed automatic transmission, depending on model. The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet This section describes operation of both the six-speed and the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles. nine-speed transmission. 244 STARTING AND OPERATING Software and calibration is refined to optimize the custom- NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, er’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the very specific driving situations and conditions. DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. between these gears. The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control. Moving the gear selector into the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position will manually select the transmission gear. Refer to AutoStick in this section for further information. Gear Selector STARTING AND OPERATING 245 Gear Ranges When exiting the vehicle, always: Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from 1. Apply the parking brake. PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This 3. Turn the ignition OFF. is especially important when the engine is cold. 4. Remove the key fob from the vehicle. PARK (P) NOTE: Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the vehicle is parked on a steep slope. This range supplements the parking brake by locking the 6 transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING! Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the range. park brake. Always apply the park brake fully when When parking on a level surface, you may shift the exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move- transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking ment and possible injury or damage. brake. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by WARNING! trying to When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult PARK before exiting the vehicle. to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. (Continued) 246 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit fatally injured. Children should be warned not to someone or something. Only shift into gear when the touch the park brake, brake pedal or the transmis- engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly sion gear selector. pressing the brake pedal. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in • The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear if a location accessible to children), and do not leave the vehicle is moving while shifting. the ignition in the ON/RUN mode. A child could • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure operate power windows, other controls, or move the those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you vehicle. should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a CAUTION! complete stop, then apply the park brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. • Before moving the transmission gear selector out of When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmis- PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, unwanted movement. damage to the gear selector could result. • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. damage the drivetrain. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

(Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 247

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you WARNING! have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position: Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the • When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices gear selector, and firmly move the selector all the way that limit your response to changing traffic or road forward until it stops and is fully seated. conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. • Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P). CAUTION! • With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector 6 will not move out of PARK. Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause REVERSE (R) severe transmission damage. This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Op- REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete erating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case stop. Of Emergency” for further information.

NEUTRAL (N) DRIVE (D) Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged This range should be used for most city and highway periods with the engine running. The engine may be driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, started in this range. Apply the park brake and shift the and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle. upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. 248 STARTING AND OPERATING When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when are inhibited until the engine and/or transmission is warm operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while this section). Normal operation will resume once the towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control to temperature(s) have risen to a suitable level. select a lower gear (refer to AutoStick in this section for AutoStick further information). Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro- life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im- limits, the transmission controller may modify the trans- prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also mission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or ex- provide you with more control during passing, city driv- pand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer This is done to prevent transmission damage due to towing, and many other situations. overheating. Operation If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the Transmis- sion Temperature Warning Light may illuminate, and the When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside transmission may operate differently until the transmission the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and rear- cools down. ward. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the gear selector forward During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be (-) triggers a downshift and rearward (+) an upshift. The modified depending on engine and/or transmission tem- current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster. perature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter when the driver moves the gear selector rearward (+) or clutch (and, for the nine-speed, shifts into 8th or 9th gear), STARTING AND OPERATING 249 forward (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condi- • The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of tion would result. It will remain in the selected gear until a vehicle speed. another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when below. AutoStick is enabled. • Six-speed transmissions will automatically upshift when • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault necessary to prevent engine over-speed. or overheat condition is detected. • The transmission will automatically downshift as the NOTE: vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is not active. display the current gear. 6 • The transmission will automatically downshift to first To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the position at any time without taking your foot off the vehicle is accelerated. accelerator pedal. • You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear (or WARNING! third gear, in six-speed models, or in 4LO range, Snow mode, or Sand mode, where available). Tapping (+) (at a Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions. and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur. 250 STARTING AND OPERATING Transmission Limp Home Mode NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab- mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos- result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home tic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL. service is required. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Torque Converter Clutch Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans- included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A mission. clutch within the torque converter engages automatically In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the feeling or response during normal operation in the upper following steps: gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. 1. Stop the vehicle. NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to the transmission to NEUTRAL. 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is 3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine turns OFF. higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The torque 5. Restart the engine. converter clutch will function normally once the pow- ertrain is sufficiently warm. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. STARTING AND OPERATING 251 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED Four Wheel Drive (4x4) Jeep Active Drive The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in normal driving mode. Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic with no driver inputs or NOTE: It is not possible to carry out the change of mode additional driving skills required. Under normal driving when the vehicle exceeds the speed of 75 mph (120 km/h). conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4) the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front The buttons for the activation of four wheel drive are wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the located on the device Selec-Terrain and allow you to select 6 rear wheels. the following: Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input • 4WD LOCK (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to • 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only) the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch and performance characteristics.

CAUTION! All wheels must have the same size and type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power transfer unit. 252 STARTING AND OPERATING Active Drive Control — If Equipped Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk models only)

Selec-Terrain Switch Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk) The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to ensure imme- The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the off-road diate availability of torque to the rear drive axles. This performance in all modes. To enable 4WD LOW, please feature is selectable in AUTO mode and automatic in the follow the steps below: other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the Enabling 4WD LOW following ways: • When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed. With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in the ON/RUN or with the engine running, shift the transmission into NEU- • When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated from AUTO to TRAL and push the button once 4WD LOW. The instru- any other off-road modes. ment cluster will display the message 4WD LOW once the shift is complete. STARTING AND OPERATING 253 NOTE: SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED • Both LOCK and LOW LEDs will blink and then become Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle con- active on the Selec-Terrain switch until the shift is trol systems, along with driver input, to provide the best complete. performance for all terrains. • The instrument cluster display will illuminate the 4WD Mode Selection Guide LOW icon. Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode. Disabling 4WD LOW

To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must be 6 stationary and the transmission shifted into NEUTRAL. Push the 4WD LOW button once.

Selec-Terrain Switch 254 STARTING AND OPERATING operating conditions), the transmission may use second gear (rather than first gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage. • SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor traction, such as dry sand. The transmission is set to provide maximum traction. • MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor traction, such as roads covered by mud or wet grass. • ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only available in 4WD LOW range. The device sets the vehicle to maximize traction and allow the highest steering capacity for Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk) off-road surfaces. This mode gives you the maximum • AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a continuous performance off-road. Use for low speed obstacles such operation, is fully automatic and can be used on and off as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. road. This mode balances traction to ensure maneuver- NOTE: ability and acceleration improvement compared to a • vehicle with two wheel drive. This mode also reduces Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped fuel consumption, since it allows the disconnect of the with the Off-Road package. drive shaft where conditions permit. • Activate the Hill Descent Control for steep downhill • SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater stability control. See “Electronic Brake Control System” in this under conditions of bad weather. For use on and off road section for further information. on surfaces with poor traction, such as roads covered with snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on certain STARTING AND OPERATING 255 POWER STEERING If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFOR- The electric power steering system will give you good MANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in displayed on the instrument cluster display, it indicates tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the which caused an over temperature condition in the power electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces steering system. You will lose power steering assistance assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you momentarily until the over temperature condition no lon- will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually. ger exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns WARNING! off. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To 6 Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a NOTE: safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be • obtained as soon as possible. Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING OR steering effort, especially at low speeds and during POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE parking maneuvers. SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon are • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for displayed on the instrument cluster display, it service. indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get- ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 256 STARTING AND OPERATING STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • The vehicle must be completely stopped. The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel con- • The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the sumption. The system will stop the engine automatically brake pedal depressed. during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate will automatically re-start the engine. indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty starter, maintained upon return to an engine running condition. enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop handle the additional engine starts. Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many Automatic Mode safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal cus- Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start tomer engine start. At that time, the system will go into system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met, Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations the engine can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Au- will not stop: tostop” mode. • Driver’s seat belt is not buckled. To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must • Driver’s door is not closed. Occur: • Battery temperature is too warm or cold. • The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A • STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the Battery charge is low. instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section. • The vehicle is on a steep grade. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To • Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not been achieved. STARTING AND OPERATING 257 • HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed. To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode • HVAC set to MAX A/C. While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. • Engine has not reached normal operating temperature. The transmission will automatically re-engage upon en- • The transmission is not in a forward gear. gine restart. • Hood is open. Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto- • Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode. matically While In Autostop Mode: • • Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure. The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE. • 6 Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include: To maintain cabin temperature comfort. • • Accelerator pedal input. HVAC is set to full defrost mode. • • Engine temp too high. HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually adjusted. • 5 MPH (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from previous • AUTOSTOP. Battery voltage drops too low. • • Steering angle beyond threshold. Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applications). • Adaptive Cruise Control is on and speed is set. • STOP/START OFF switch is pressed. It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times • without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/ A STOP/START system error occurs. START READY state under more extreme conditions of the • 4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode. items listed above. 258 STARTING AND OPERATING Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric 2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in instru- Park Brake While In Autostop Mode: ment cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis- • The drivers door is open and brake pedal released. play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • The drivers door is open and the drivers seat belt is unbuckled. 3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/ START system) the engine will not be stopped. • The engine hood has been opened. • 4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON A STOP/START system error occurs. condition every time the ignition is turned off and back To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System on. 1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off. System Malfunction If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/ START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked by your authorized dealer.

STOP/START OFF Switch STARTING AND OPERATING 259 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). speed control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the the steering wheel. desired vehicle set speed.

WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system 6 cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

To Activate Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The Speed Control Buttons cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button 1 — On/Off a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The 2 — SET (+)/Accel 3 — RES/Resume system should be turned off when not in use. 4 — SET (-)/Decel 5 — CANC/Cancel 260 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed increment shown is depen- Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use dent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or (km/h): cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose U.S. Speed (mph) control and have an accident. Always leave the system • off when you are not using it. Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button To Set A Desired Speed results in an increase of 1 mph. Turn the Speed Control on. • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed new set speed will be established. and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button. Metric Speed (km/h) When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelera- increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button tor and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. results in an increase of 1 km/h. To Vary The Speed Setting • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the To Increase Speed new set speed will be established. When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by To Decrease Speed pushing the SET (+) button. When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the pushing the SET (-) button. instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster STARTING AND OPERATING 261 The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the To Accelerate For Passing instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric To Resume Speed (km/h): To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and U.S. Speed (mph) release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button To Deactivate 6 results in a decrease of 1 mph. A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel) • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle continue to decrease until the button is released, then the will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set new set speed will be established. speed from memory. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to OFF, erases the set speed from memory. • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED results in a decrease of 1 km/h. The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia continue to decrease until the button is released, then the and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a new set speed will be established. parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and recommendations. 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense Warning Display disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if changed to the ON/RUN position. “Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer - ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. REVERSE. The system will remain active while in RE- Refer to Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further VERSE until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi- information. mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. While in REVERSE, and The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru- above the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi- within the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the speed is too fast. The system will become active again detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in when the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). information. ParkSense Sensors ParkSense Display The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within display will show the park assist ready system status. the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc- single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s tion, depending on the location, type and orientation of the distance and location relative to the vehicle. obstacle. If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will STARTING AND OPERATING 263 show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the audible chime increases as the objects gets close to the vehicle. If an obstacle is detected in the left and /or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the audible chime increases as the objects gets close to the vehicle. 6

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc 264 STARTING AND OPERATING

Slow Tone/Solid Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc STARTING AND OPERATING 265

WARNING ALERTS Rear Dis- Greater 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than tance than (200-150 (150-120 (120-100 (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 inches (inches/cm) 79 inches cm) cm) cm) (30 cm) (200 cm) Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing ing Arcs — None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash- 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing Center ing ing 6 Arcs — None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing Right ing Audible None Audible chime increases as the objects get close to the vehicle. Continuous Alert Chime Radio Vol- No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ume Re- duced NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UN- AVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect “Instrument Cluster Display” for more information. Under display. this condition, ParkSense will not operate. When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” the system, the instrument cluster display will appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for ap- outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper proximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc- Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is appear, see your authorized dealer. moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. appears in the instrument cluster display, see your authorized dealer. The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED Cleaning The ParkSense System will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor be on. jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per STARTING AND OPERATING 267 ParkSense System Usage Precautions are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system NOTE: misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument properly. cluster display. • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could • The operation of the rear sensors is automatically deac- affect the performance of ParkSense. tivated when the trailer’s electric plug is inserted in the • vehicle’s tow hook socket. The rear sensors are automati- When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster 6 display will read “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once cally reactivated when the trailer’s cable plug is re- you turn ParkSense OFF, it remains off until you turn it moved. on again, even if you cycle the ignition. WARNING! • ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone. • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, Failure to do so can result in the system not working and blind spots before backing up. You are respon- properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/ • bumper. Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. (Continued) 268 STARTING AND OPERATING LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! (Continued) disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is LaneSense Operation not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con- lane markings and measure vehicle position within the tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball lane boundaries. mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle When both lane markings are detected and the driver is behind the vehicle. unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel, as well CAUTION! as a visual warning in the instrument cluster display, to • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. The driver may manually override the haptic warning by Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not applying torque into the steering wheel at any time. detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver sensors will not be detected when they are in close unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn proximity. signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not driver looks over his/her shoulder when using be provided. ParkSense. STARTING AND OPERATING 269 NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on button to turn the system on (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense the steering wheel and provide an audible and visual On” message is shown in the instrument cluster display. warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel. Turning LaneSense On Or Off The default status of LaneSense is “Off”. The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below 6 the Uconnect display.

Lane Sense On Message To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense button once to turn the system off (LED turns on). NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

LaneSense Warning Button 270 STARTING AND OPERATING LaneSense Warning Message Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift • When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale condition through the instrument cluster display. is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray unintentional lane departure occurs. when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been and the LaneSense telltale is solid white. approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale ) STARTING AND OPERATING 271 Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected • When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. 6

Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale ) NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected.

Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale ) 272 STARTING AND OPERATING • When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn solid approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left white. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At lane boundary. this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the • For example: if approaching the left side of the lane the opposite direction of the lane boundary. steering wheel will turn to the right. • For example: if approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.

Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin Line/Solid Yellow Telltale ) Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line, Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale ) NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure. STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected thick lane line flashes yellow, the left thin line remains changes from and the LaneSense telltale is solid white. solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale solid white to flashing yellow.

System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale ) Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale ) • When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar is solid white when only the left lane marking has behavior for a right lane departure when only the right been detected and the system is ready to provide lane marking has been detected. visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected • When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, • When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow. from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the is solid green when both lane markings have been steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual boundary. • warnings in the instrument cluster display and a For example: if approaching the left side of the lane the torque warning in the steering wheel if an uninten- steering wheel will turn to the right. tional lane departure occurs.

Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Solid Yellow Telltale ) Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale ) STARTING AND OPERATING 275 • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been Changing LaneSense Status approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of thick lane line flashes yellow and the left thin line the torque warning (Low/Medium/High) and the warn- changes remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale ing zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time configure through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa- direction of the lane boundary. tion. • For example: if approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. NOTE: • The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel 6 whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes, traction control system, electronic stability control, forward collision warning, etc.). • Use of the turn signals and Hazard Warning flashers also suppresses the warnings.

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale ) “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure. 276 STARTING AND OPERATING After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView NOTE: With Camera Delay turned on, the camera image camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear can be disabled via the Image Defeat (X) button on the license plate. touch screen when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program- When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image mable modes of operation that may be selected through the to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi- backup path based on the steering wheel position. A media” for further information. dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/ When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera receiver. delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera the vehicle. image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds The following table shows the approximate distances for after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed each zone: exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the vehicles ignition is switched to the OFF position. Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater) STARTING AND OPERATING 277 REFUELING THE VEHICLE WARNING! The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed at the filler Drivers must be careful when backing up even when pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always upon insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle. The Capless check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to Fuel System is designed so that it prevents the filling of an check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc- incorrect type of fuel. tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must 1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer edge of continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to the Fuel Door. do so can result in serious injury or death. 6

CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. Fuel Filler Door NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Emergency Gas Can Refueling Most gas cans will not open the flapper door. A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow emergency refueling with a gas can. 1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area. 2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel nozzle.

Filling Procedure 2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system. 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling. 4. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. 5. Wait ten seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to Fuel Funnel allow fuel to drain from nozzle. 3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door 6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door. open. STARTING AND OPERATING 279 4. Pour fuel into funnel opening. VEHICLE LOADING 5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting Certification Label back in the spare tire storage area. As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- NOTE: tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar. • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight WARNING! Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is 6 • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the being filled. bottom of the label is your VIN. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and may cause the MIL to turn on. The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and could be burned. Always place gas containers on the rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so ground while filling. GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo. 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Curb Weight The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded. capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, scale before any occupants or cargo are added. springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in- Loading creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi- The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear cle’s GVWR. of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by Tire Size weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly Rim Size distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear listed. axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the Inflation Pressure specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down all loading conditions up to full GAWR. low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect Common Towing Definitions on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way The following trailer towing related definitions will assist the brakes operate. you in understanding the following information: CAUTION! Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose 6 control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa- vehicle. tion. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) TRAILER TOWING The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all In this section you will find safety tips and information on cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo- limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this operation condition. information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, the trailer must be supported by the scale. follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Trailer Sway Control The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor- unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. mation. If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies WARNING! individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to It is important that you do not exceed the maximum attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition Weight-Carrying Hitch can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some Tongue Weight (TW) other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the are commonly used to tow small and medium sized hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of trailers. the load on your vehicle. Weight-Distributing Hitch Trailer Frontal Area A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for maximum width of the front of a trailer. heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides STARTING AND OPERATING 283 for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and WARNING! brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes system may reduce handling, stability, braking per- positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway formance, and could result in a collision. control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch • Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch may be required depending on vehicle and trailer and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Vehicle dealer for additional information. Rating (GAWR) requirements. 6 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) (Continued) Maximum GTW Maximum Tongue Wt. Engine/Transmission Model (Gross Trailer Wt.) (See Note) 2.4L / Manual FWD or 4WD Trailer towing is not recommended. 2.4L / 6 Speed Auto FWD or 4WD Trailer towing is not recommended. 2.4L / 9 Speed Auto 4WD 2000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg) When towing a trailer the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 220 lbs (100 kg), whichever is lower provided that the operating speed is restricted to 62 mph (100 km/h) or less. Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds and loads. Towing limits quoted represent the maximum towing ability of the vehicle at its Gross Combined Mass to restart on a 12 percent gradient at sea level. The performance and economy of all models will be reduced when used for towing. 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer And Tongue Weight Consider the following items when computing the weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on on the front/rear axles of the vehicle: your trailer hitch. • The trailer tongue weight of the trailer. • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle. • The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the tire loading information placard located on the driver’s door pillar for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Towing Requirements WARNING! To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended. Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as CAUTION! possible: • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles and will not shift during travel. When trailering (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts or other parts could be damaged. can occur that may be difficult for the driver to • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer control. You could lose control of your vehicle and 6 is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do have a collision. not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can loads. cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus- Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servic- pension, chassis structure or tires. ing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And • Safety chains must always be used between your Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings. hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in

(Continued) 286 STARTING AND OPERATING • WARNING! (Continued) Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the • transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before chock the trailer wheels. towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And • GCWR must not be exceeded. Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure. • Total weight must be distributed between the tow • When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And vehicle and the trailer such that the following four Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement proce- ratings are not exceeded: dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capac- 1. GVWR ity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits. 2. GTW Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes 3. GAWR • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible per- Towing Requirements — Tires sonal injury. • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is spare tire. required when towing a trailer with electronically actu- • Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a while using a full size spare tire. hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe brake controller is not required. and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire inflation procedures. STARTING AND OPERATING 287 • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, 2,000 lbs (907 kg). stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. WARNING! The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy- wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys- connector. tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring when you need them and could have a collision. 6 • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis- harness. tance. When towing you should allow for additional The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision. to the following illustrations.

CAUTION! If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. 288 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: • Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water. • Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.

Seven-Pin Connector 1 — Battery 5 — Ground 2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn 3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps 4 — Electric Brakes

Four-Pin Connector 1 — Female Pins 4 — Park 2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn 3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Towing Tips Cooling System Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat- backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy ing, take the following actions: traffic. City Driving Automatic Transmission • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting Highway Driving when towing. For increased engine braking on steep down- • hill grades, select the LOW range. Reduce speed. 6 • Speed Control — If Equipped Temporarily turn off air conditioning. • Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads. • When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed. • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. 290 STARTING AND OPERATING RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

WHEELS OFF THE FRONT WHEEL DRIVE FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE TOWING CONDITION GROUND (FWD) (4WD) Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK NOTE: Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) • When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable Models state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels Highway Safety offices for additional details. are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow • You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake procedure: feature is enabled or disabled via the customer program- 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following mable features in the Uconnect Settings. the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. 3. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the transmission in PARK. Turn the engine OFF. STARTING AND OPERATING 291

4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following CAUTION! the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the start the engine. ground can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing 6. Press and hold the brake pedal. is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War- 7. Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB). ranty. 8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and release DRIVING TIPS the brake pedal. 6 On-Road Driving Tips CAUTION! Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar- • rower track to make them capable of performing in a wide Towing with the front wheels on the ground will variety of off-road applications. Specific design character- cause severe transmission damage. Damage from istics give them a higher center of gravity than conven- improper towing is not covered under the New tional passenger cars. Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better remains released, while being towed. view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off- using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle may road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. be towed on flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this wheels are OFF the ground. vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Off-Road Driving Tips Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre- When To Use 4WD LOW Range vent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascend- (and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed ing or descending steep hills, and to increase low-speed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less pulling power (refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave Equipped” in this section for further details). This range effects. should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, Flowing Water mud, or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range. avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the Driving Through Water flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water, water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink there are a number of precautions that must be considered into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are down- before entering the water: stream of your entry point to allow for drifting.

CAUTION! Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 16 inches When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (40.5 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as wave effects. Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. STARTING AND OPERATING 293 (Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water deeper Hill Climbing than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 conditions at the crest and/or on the other side. cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a Maintenance lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills. fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Transfer NOTE: Brakes should be applied at increased slippage, but Unit, and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not been before coming to a stop to avoid digging into the loose contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants (milky, surface and rendering the operator of the vehicle stuck/ 6 foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon immobile. as possible to prevent component damage. If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional immediately apply the brakes. Once stopped, shift to control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the com- gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain pression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed. mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four-Wheel If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for further them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires. information. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the WARNING! wheels and traction will be lost. If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control. (Continued) 294 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued) When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission rolling the vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in whenever possible. REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake. After Driving Off-Road Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than NOTE: Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is drive straight up or down. always a good idea to check for damage. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, • Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and the front wheels slowly left and right. This may provide a exhaust system for damage. fresh “bite” into the surface and may provide traction to • complete the climb. Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required. Traction Downhill • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD System the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus- to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent Control if pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the equipped (refer to Safety Features in the “Safety” section values specified in the Service Manual. for further information). Let the vehicle go slowly down • Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things the hill with all four wheels turning against engine com- could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel pression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts. speed and direction. STARTING AND OPERATING 295 • After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING! Abrasive material in any part of the braking system may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking performance. Full braking power may not be available 6 to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, inspect and clean the braking components as soon as possible.

• Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance. Freeing the wheels of impacted material will likely rectify imbalance condition.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

CONTENTS HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...... 299 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...... 330 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .299 ▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ...... 331 BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 305 ▫ Preparations For Jacking ...... 333 ▫ Replacement Bulbs ...... 305 ▫ Jacking Instructions ...... 333 ▫ High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps — ▫ Road Tire Installation ...... 338 7 If Equipped ...... 306 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ...... 338 ▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ...... 307 JUMP STARTING ...... 350 ▫ Replacing Interior Bulbs ...... 313 ▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...... 350 FUSES ...... 319 ▫ Jump Starting Procedure ...... 351 ▫ General Information ...... 319 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY...... 353 ▫ Fuse Location ...... 320 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...... 353 ▫ Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit . .320 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ...... 354 ▫ Interior Fuses ...... 326 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...... 355 ▫ Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit ...... 328 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...... 357 298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ▫ Without The Key Fob ...... 358 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) ...... 361 ▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models —WithKeyFob...... 358 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ...... 361 ▫ 4x4 Models ...... 359 ▫ Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ...... 359 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 299 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower center area of the instrument panel. Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be 7 used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. Assist And SOS Mirror When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even 1 — SOS Button though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. 2 — ASSIST Button

NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a may wear down your battery. SOS button. 300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ASSIST Call WARNING! The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the any one of the following support centers: road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the • steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as- Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, sume all risks related to the use of the features and just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional may result in an accident involving serious injury or fees may apply for roadside assistance. death. • SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian. NOTE: • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by vehicle issues. the subscriber. SOS Call • The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G 1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror. (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call (data) network. connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301 2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS NOTE: buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized connection to a SOS operator has been made. by the subscriber. 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS • Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator following important vehicle information to a SOS opera- may be able to open a voice connection with the tor: vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once • Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call. the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the • The vehicle brand. vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear • The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle. sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call 7 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi- operator until the SOS operator terminates the connec- tional help is needed. tion. 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate WARNING! emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates. ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume WARNING! all risks related to the use of the features and applica- • If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire tions in this vehicle. Only use the features and applica- or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or tions when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result location), do not wait for voice contact from an in an accident involving serious injury or death. (Continued) 302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit • Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location. could cause the air bag system to fail when you need • Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not network and GPS antennas. You could prevent oper- there to help protect you. able network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. SOS Call System Limitations An operable network and GPS signal reception is Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system required for the SOS Call system to function properly. capabilities. • The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may answer or respond to SOS system calls. prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause following may occur at the time the malfunction is de- the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle: equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or • The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VE- and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red. HICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REA- • The Device Screen will display the following message SON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI- “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND dealer.” SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPER- ATE. • An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.” (Continued) IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303 • WARNING! LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob- • Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you structed. will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview • Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility. Mirror light is illuminated, have your authorized • dealer service the SOS Call system immediately. Operator error by the SOS operator. • The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the • LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion. air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a • Weather. malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your • Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately. WARNING! 7

Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the Call system operation. These include, but are not limited steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as- to, the following factors: sume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and • Delayed accessories mode is active. applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so • The ignition is in the OFF position. may result in an accident involving serious injury or • The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact. death. • The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash. • The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash. 304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY NOTE: CAUTION! • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. • Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could mirror clean. prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to function properly. General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305 BULB REPLACEMENT Replacement Bulbs

Interior Bulbs Lamps Bulb Number Front Courtesy Light C5W Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof) C5W Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof) C5W Interior Lights HT-168 7 Dome Light (Glove Box) HT-168 Exterior Bulbs Lamps Bulb Number Low Beam Headlamps (Halogen) H11LL High Beam Headlamps (Halogen) 9005LL Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL ) PSX24W Front Direction Indicator Lamps 7444NA Front Position – Premium LED LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) Front Fog Lamps H11LL Low Beam / High Beam Headlamps (HID) D3S (HID) (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) Side Indicators (Front – Halogen) W5W 306 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Lamps Bulb Number Side Indicators (Front – HID) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) Side Indicators (Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) Tail/Brake Lights Premium Tail Lights: LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) Base Tail Lights: W21/5WLL-M Turn Indicators W21WLL For Premium Tail Lamps W21/5WLL For Base Tail Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) Liftgate Lamp Reverse W21WLL Liftgate Lamp Tail LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer) High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps — NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when If Equipped the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source your- WARNING! self. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned

(Continued) IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 307

WARNING! (Continued) ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.

Replacing Exterior Bulbs Headlamps Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen The bulbs can be accessed from the wheel liner with the following procedure: 7 1. Turn the front wheels completely. Headlamp 2. Remove the wheel liner. 1 — Low Beam Bulb Cap 2 — High Beam Bulb Cap 3. Remove the headlamp bulb cap. 4. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counterclockwise then pull outwards. 308 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING! Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with the engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold, to avoid the danger of burns.

Turn Signal Light/Position Lights/Daytime Running Lights To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Turn the front wheels completely. 2. Remove the wheel liner. 3. Remove the electrical connectors. Headlamp Bulb Socket 5. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp bulb connector 4. For the DRL bulb, grip the bulb at the top and bottom and remove the bulb and socket. locking tabs and squeeze to and remove the bulb. 6. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it’s properly 5. To replace the DRL bulb gently push bulb towards locked. housing. Be sure to hear both the top and bottom locking tabs “CLICK” to ensure the bulb is properly 7. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it clockwise seated. making sure it is properly locked. 6. For the turn signal bulb, rotate in a counterclockwise 8. Reinstall the wheel liner. direction and remove the bulb and bulb socket. Pull the NOTE: We advise referring to an authorized dealer. bulb axially to remove it from the socket. 7. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them clockwise making sure that it is properly locked. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 309 8. Reconnect the electrical connectors. 9. Reinstall the wheel liner. NOTE: We advise referring to an authorized dealer. Front Fog Lights To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Turn the front wheels completely. 2. Remove the wheel liner.

3. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the 7 electrical connector. Fog Lamp Housing 4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace the bulb. 1 — Bulb

5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the bulb is locked into place. 6. Reconnect the electrical connector. 7. Reinstall the wheel liner. NOTE: We advise referring to an authorized dealer. 310 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Side Indicators The Side Indicators are LED. For their replacement see your authorized dealer. Rear Body Side Tail Lamps Contain the following: • Position lights • Stop lights • Direction indicator To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Open the liftgate. Body Side Tail Lamp Opening 2. Using a suitable tool remove fasteners. 1 — Fasteners

3. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the release. 4. Remove the rear body side tail lamp, sliding it away from the back of the vehicle. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311

Body Side Tail Lamp Reverse Side of Tail Lamp 1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp 1 — Direction Indicator Bulb / Stop Lamp Bulb 2 — Ball Stud 2 — Electrical Connector 3 — Ball Studs 5. Replace the bulb as necessary by turning and removing the bulb housing. 6. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked. 7. Reposition the rear body side lamp assembly on the car. 8. Reconnect the electrical connector. 9. Reinstall the body side lamp making sure to align the ball studs. 312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Reverse Lamps 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Using a suitable tool remove the access panel for body side lamps, remove lift gate access cover for lift gate lamps.

Body Side Tail Lamp 1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp 2 — Ball Stud

10. Install fasteners and tighten body side lamp assembly. 11. Finally close the tailgate. Liftgate 1 — Lift Gate Access Covers IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 313 3. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the re- Replacing Interior Bulbs lease. Front Courtesy Light 4. Remove bulb and replace making sure it is properly To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: locked. 1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light 5. Reconnect the electrical connector. assemby. 6. Reinstall the access panels making sure they are locked in correctly. 7. Finally close the tailgate.

3rd Stop Lamp 7 The CHMSL is LED. For their replacement, see your authorized dealer. License Plate Lights The License Plate light is LED. For their replacement, see your authorized dealer.

Front Courtesy Light 314 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as shown.

Front Courtesy Bulb Housing Front Courtesy Bulb Housing 4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are properly 1 — Retaining Clips locked. 2 — Bulb Housing 5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light housing making sure that they are properly locked. 3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb housing. 6. Install the front courtesy light, making sure that it is properly locked. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 315 Dome Light Vanity Mirror — If Equipped 3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure that it To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: is properly locked. 1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the mirror frame 4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror. with the mirror light cover attached. Dome Light Glove Compartment 2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, and To replace the bulb proceed as follows: then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is properly 1. Open the glove compartment. locked between the contacts. 2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the bulb to replace it. 7

Visor 1 — Visor Mirror Cover 2 — Visor Mirror Light Bulb Removal/Installation 3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked. 316 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Dome Light 2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side contacts. To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Lower the handle in the direction shown; remove the dome light.

Bulb 3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts. 4. Reinstall the dome light. Grab Handle/Dome Light IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 317 Interior Cargo Lights 2. Fully disengage the bulb holder from the housing. To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Using thumb with slight pressure – push bulb holder to the side.

Bulb Holder

Bulb Holder 318 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

3. Rotate bulb holder to replace bulb. WARNING! • Modifications or repair of the electrical system performed incorrectly and without taking into account the technical characteristics can cause malfunctions with the risk of fire. • Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the event of breakage be careful of the projection of fragments of glass. • Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in contact with the fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In Bulb case of accidental contact, rub the bulb with a cloth dampened with alcohol and allow to dry.

NOTE: It is recommended to have your bulbs replaced by your authorized dealer. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 319 FUSES When a device does not work, you must check the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt. WARNING! Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro- extended periods of time with the engine off may result in priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as vehicle battery discharge. the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. 7 • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems Blade Fuses (engine system, transmission system) or steering 1 — Fuse Element system blows, contact an authorized dealer. 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element. 3 — Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown General Information fuse). The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current. 320 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Fuse Location Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw The fuses are grouped into controllers located in the engine Proceed as follows: compartment. 1. Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise. Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit 2. Slowly release the screw. The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left 3. Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward. side of the engine compartment. Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw Proceed as follows: 1. Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide completely from top to bottom. 2. Fully depress the screw, using the special screwdriver supplied.

Fuse Panel & Cover Location 1 — Cover Screw 2 — Fuse Cover IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 321 3. Slowly turn the screw clockwise. 4. Release the screw.

Battery Fuse Cover Location 1 — Fuse Cover Tabs 2 — Fuse Cover 322 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Com- puter F02 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Com- puter, Rear Distribu- tion Units F03 – 30 Amp Pink with – Supply Body Com- HID Lamps puter 20 Amp Blue without HID Lamps F04 – 40 Amp Tan – Brake Control Elec- tronics Module F05 – 40 Amp Tan – PTC Heater F06 40 Amp Orange – – Starter Relay F07 40 Amp Orange – – Rear Distribution Unit For Trailer Tow Usage F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Supply for F24, F87, Steering Control F09 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Control Module En- gine F10 – – 20 Amp Yellow Horn IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 323

Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description F11 – – 20 Amp Yellow – Supply Secondary 1.4L Gas & Diesel Loads Engines 25 Amp Clear – 2.4 L Engines F14 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Diesel Crankcase Heater F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Mod- ule Pump 7 F16 – – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Mod- ule Power, Automatic Transmission F17 – – 10 Amp Red Engine Secondary Loads F18 – – 20 Amp Yellow 12V Rear Cargo Out- let Ignition Powered F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor and PWM Rad Fan enable F20 – – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump 324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description F22 – – 20 Amp Yellow – Power Control Mod- Gas Engine ule Engine 15 Amp Blue – Die- sel Engine F23 – – 30 Amp Green Window Heater Grid F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Sup- ply Automatic Trans- mission F30 – – 20 Amp Yellow 12V Rear Cargo Out- (Customer Select- let Constant Battery able, Move From Powered F18) F81 60 Amp Blue – – Glow Plug Module F82 – 40 Amp Green – Diesel Fuel Filter Heater F83 – 40 Amp Green – HVAC Fan F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel Drive F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Auto- matic Transmission F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mir- rors IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 325

Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description F89 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery State Of Charge) Fxx – – 10 Amp Red Dual Battery Control Relay The Fuse Box has additional ATO fuse holders installed on the bottom of the box.

Cavity ATO / UNIVAL Fuse Description 7 F1 5 Amp Biege Drivetrain Control Module (4x4/AWD) F2 10 Amp Red ECM — Start Diagnostic Sense F3 2 Amp Grey Mod Steering Control 326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.

Cavity Blade Fuse Description F31 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller F33 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Passenger F34 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Driver F36 20 Amp Yellow Intrussion Module/Siren, Radio, UCI/USB Port, VSU, Climate Control, Electronic Steering Lock, Power Folding Mirrors F37 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster, Drivetrain Control Module, Adaptive Cruise, ECC (HVAC) Blower F38 20 Amp Yellow Door Lock/Unlock F42 7.5 Amp Brown Brake System Module, Electric Power Steering F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front And Rear F47 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Window Lifter F48 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Window Lifter F49 7.5 Amp Brown Park Assist, Blind Spot, Voltage Stabilizer, Humidity Sen- sor, Sunroof, Electronic Steering Lock, Temp Sense, Mir- ror, Heated Seats, Light And Rain Sensor IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 327

Cavity Blade Fuse Description F50 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller F51 7.5 Amp Brown Electronic Climate Control, Occupant Classification, Rear View Camera, Climate Control, Headlamp Leveling, Ter- rain Select, Heated Rear Window, Trailer Tow, Haptic Lane Departure F53 7.5 Amp Brown Keyless Ignition Node Module, Electric Park Brake, RF Hub, Cluster F94 15 Amp Blue ECC (HVAC) Blower, Lumbar Adjust Driver Seat, Power Outlets 7 328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit To access the fuses, remove the access door from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area. The fuses may be contained in two units. Fuse holder No. 1 is located closest to the rear of the vehicle and fuse holder No. 2 (if equipped with trailer towing) is located closest to the front of the vehicle.

Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities 1 — Fuse Holder No. 1 2 — Fuse Holder No. 2 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 329 Fuse Holder No. 1 Cavity Mini Fuse Description F1 30 Amp Green Power Inverter F2 30 Amp Green Memory Seat F3 20 Amp Yellow Sun Roof – If Equipped F4 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Passenger Side) F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side) F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Lumbar (Power Seats) F7 15 Amp Blue Heated Steering Wheel / Ventilated Seats 7 F8 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats Fuse Holder No. 2 Cavity Mini Fuse Description F1 10 Amp Red Controller Exterior Lighting On Trailer F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers Side) F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger Side) F7 10 Amp Red TTM Jumper Battery Feed 330 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY On the Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit bracket, there is a Maxi Fuse holder for the Power Liftgate and an ATO / Uni Val fuse holder for the HIFI Audio System.

Cavity Maxi Fuse Description F01 30 Amp Green Power Liftgate

Cavity ATO / Uni-Val Fuse Description F02 25 Amp Clear HIFI Audio System JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING! (Continued) • WARNING! Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the the road to avoid the danger of being hit when vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be operating the jack or changing the wheel. jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The slippery areas. vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.

(Continued) IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331 Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage 1. Open the liftgate. If equipped, the jack and tools are located in the rear 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle. storage compartment, below the spare tire.

Load Floor Handle Jack And Tools Location 1 — Jack 2 — Alignment Pin 3 — Wheel Bolt Wrench 4 — Emergency Funnel 5 — Screwdriver 332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire, and remove the spare wheel from the vehicle. The jack and tools will be found beneath.

Jack And Tools 1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench 2 — Jack Spare Tire Fastener 3 — Emergency Funnel 4. Remove the alignment pin from the middle, rotate the 4 — Screwdriver 5 — Alignment Pin jack counterclockwise, and lift it from the foam tray. 5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 333

WARNING! 5. Turn the ignition off to the OFF position. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery the vehicle is being jacked. 7 areas. Jacking Instructions WARNING! WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • changing the wheel. Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. 3. Apply the parking brake. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be 4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmis- raised. sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission). (Continued) 334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING! (Continued) • Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmission in PARK. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. Jack Warning Label • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. CAUTION! • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on facing the ground. locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench. 2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335 3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. 4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill cladding.

Rear Jacking Location

Jacking Locations 336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting the spare tire. 8. Mount the spare tire.

CAUTION! Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

Front Jacking Location 5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.

WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.

Mounting Spare Tire IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337 NOTE: 11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the • For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to install a wrench while at the end of the handle for increased center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to • Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in “Technical Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Servic- Specifications” for the proper lug bolt torque. If in ing And Maintenance” for additional warnings, cau- doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked tions, and information about the spare tire, its use, and with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a operation. service station. 9. Install and lightly tighten the wheel bolts. 12. Place the jack on the foam tray and open it far enough so that it is secured. Once placed in position, rotate it 7 WARNING! clockwise to lock it in. Replace the alignment pin in the To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do center hole to lock the jack in place. not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may WARNING! result in serious injury. A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. 10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the handle counterclockwise. places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. 338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Road Tire Installation 5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using 2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end the means provided. Release the parking brake before of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the driving the vehicle. wheel bolts. 6. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are WARNING! properly seated against the wheel. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit. result in serious injury. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service handle counterclockwise. Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi- 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the mately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire wrench while at the end of the handle for increased seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until (160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339 Tire Service Kit Storage Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind the rear seat. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.

Tire Service Kit Components 1 — Mode Select Knob 2 — Sealant/Air Hose 3 — Hose Accessories 4 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Power Plug Load Floor Handle 6 — Power Switch 7 — Deflation Button 8 — Pressure Gauge 340 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Using The Power Button Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following Push and release the Power Button once symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and Selecting Air Mode release the Power Button again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position for air pump operation only. Using The Deflation Button Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes Selecting Sealant Mode over-inflated. Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire. Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this section. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 341 • The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and needs WARNING! to be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle vehicle dealer. closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid • When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material Kit. • from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly the following circumstances: discarded. – If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. • For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on – If the tire has any sidewall damage. 7 the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire – If the tire has any damage from driving with Service Kit. extremely low tire pressure. • You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate – If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, tire. located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the – If the wheel has any damage. bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or – If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump wheel. and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air Mode • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into source. them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the tread of your vehicle. vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses. (Continued) 342 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit WARNING! (Continued) provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit: in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s passengers, and others around you. Hazard Warning flashers. • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and contact with clothing. running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi- 3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition in cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach the OFF position. of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do 4. Apply the parking brake. not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi- Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit: ately. 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose. 2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 343 3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire: fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 1. Always start the vehicle before turning ON the Tire onto the valve stem. Service Kit.

4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the Sealant Mode position. 7

NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire. 344 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant (white 2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power fluid) will flow from the Sealant outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Bottle through the Sealant Hose and Make sure the vehicle is running before turning ON the into the tire. Tire Service Kit. 3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance. If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the Hose: tire. 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – flowing through hose (typically takes 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose: 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose, the Pres- 1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. sure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem. Make (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the decrease quickly from approximately Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air pressure when the Sealant Bottle is empty. Mode. Push the Power Button to turn On the Tire Service Kit. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately 1. Push the Power Button to turn off the after the Sealant Bottle is empty. Con- Tire Service Kit. tinue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and loading information label located in the driver- side door opening. Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge. If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) 2. pressure within 15 minutes: Remove the speed limit label from the • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive Tire Service Kit and place sticker on the 7 the vehicle further. Call for assistance. steering wheel. If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage inflation pressure before continuing. location. Proceed to “Drive Vehicle.” 346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Drive Vehicle: After Driving: Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or ten To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section before continuing. minutes to ensure distribution of the 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap from Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. the fitting at the end of the hose. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). 2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire. 3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then screw WARNING! the fitting at the end of the Sealant Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have Hose onto the valve stem. the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible at your authorized 4. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the dealer. vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 347 5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the end of the If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: hose onto the valve stem. 1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and loading information label located in the driver-side door opening. NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, 6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air Mode push the Deflation Button to reduce the position. tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing. 7 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet. 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the 7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure vehicle. Gauge. 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): earliest opportunity at your authorized dealer or tire service center. The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering wheel after the tire has been repaired. 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement”. 348 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho- 3. Remove the bottle cover. rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit. Sealant Bottle Replacement: 1. Unwrap the power cord. 2. Unwrap the hose.

Remove The Bottle Cover

Unwrap The Hose IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 349 4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.

Remove The Bottle Rotate The Bottle Up NOTE: 5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor. • For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps reverse order. • Replacement sealant bottles are available at authorized service centers. 350 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY JUMP STARTING Preparations For Jump Start If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly. vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protec- starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please tive cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post. follow the procedures in this section carefully. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.

WARNING! Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alter- nator or electrical system may occur. Positive Battery Post IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 351

WARNING! WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition establish a ground connection and personal injury switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan could result. blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch Jump Starting Procedure bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. WARNING! • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is result in personal injury or property damage due to 7 flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or battery explosion. sparks away from the battery.

1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis- CAUTION! sion into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) Failure to follow these procedures could result in and turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK. damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical or the discharged vehicle. accessories. Connecting The Jumper Cables 3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF/ positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. LOCK. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 352 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY (-) 3. Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the WARNING! negative (-) post of the booster battery. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of could cause the battery to explode and could result in the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do and the fuel injection system. not use any other exposed metal parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle for a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence: Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Suitable Engine Ground (Example Engine Shown) 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 353 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS (+) cable from the positive post of the vehicle with the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the discharged battery. potential for overheating your engine by taking the appro- If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle, priate action. you should have the battery and charging system in- • On the highways — slow down. spected at your authorized dealer. • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in CAUTION! NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets CAUTION! draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your 7 in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air life and/or prevent the engine from starting. conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the REFUELING IN EMERGENCY “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. The fuel filling procedure in case of emergency is described in the “Emergency Gas Can Refueling”. Refer to “Refueling NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating” for further impending overheat condition: information. • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. 354 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum 3. Grasp the boot material rearward of the gear selector heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to and pull up to carefully separate the gear selector bezel high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement and boot assembly from the center console. to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE Gear Selector Bezel If a malfunction occurs, and the gear selector cannot be 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector: 5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the gear selector override access hole (at the right rear 1. Turn the engine OFF. corner of the gear selector assembly), and push and hold 2. Apply the park brake. the override release lever down. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 355 back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (for automatic transmission) or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (for manual transmission) while gently pressing the accelerator. NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmission, shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels 7 Gear Selector Override Access Hole or racing the engine. 6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position. WARNING! 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated 8. Reinstall the gear selector boot. by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you wheel right and left to clear the area around the front are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push no matter what the speed. and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift 356 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY NOTE: Push the “ESC Off” switch (if necessary), to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC Off switch again to restore “ESC On” mode.

CAUTION! • Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking- motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 357 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF FWD MODELS 4X4 MODELS The Ground Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift Or Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD ONLY METHOD 7 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent NOTE: damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other • You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment disabled before towing this vehicle to avoid inadvertent manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man- Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing devices to main feature is enabled or disabled via the customer program- structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or mable features in the Uconnect Settings. associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles • under tow must be observed. Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total electrical failure when the electric park brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed. 358 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) CAUTION! (Continued) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN • mode. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed. Note that the Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the battery Without The Key Fob is connected, ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with and brake pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle the ignition in the LOCK/OFF mode. The only approved with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must manu- method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed ally disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver’s truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent door is opened by pressing the brake pedal and then damage to the vehicle. releasing the EPB. Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models — With Key Fob If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with automatic transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle can all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. be moved. If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a CAUTION! towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels • Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Ve- raised). hicle damage may occur. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not released, while being towed. The Electric Park Brake does attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam- not need to be released if all four wheels are off the ground. age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

(Continued) IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 359 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped CAUTION! If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require- one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle. ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side of the damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered vehicle. under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use 4x4 Models both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels to the vehicle. OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or 7 with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.

CAUTION! • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not Front Tow Hooks Location covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 360 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING! • Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. • Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.

CAUTION! Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for Rear Tow Hook Location tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and subse- damage your vehicle. quently in OFF/LOCK, without opening the door. During towing, remember that not having the aid of the power brakes and the electromechanical power steering will require greater force when applying the brakes and steering of the vehicle. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 361 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re- sponse System (EARS) function.

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that 7 will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 365 ▫ Exhaust System ...... 378 ▫ Maintenance Plan...... 366 ▫ Cooling System ...... 380 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 369 ▫ Brake System ...... 384 ▫ 2.4L Engine ...... 369 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ...... 386 ▫ Checking Oil Level ...... 370 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...... 386 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...... 370 RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 388 8 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...... 371 TIRES ...... 388 DEALER SERVICE ...... 371 ▫ Tire Safety Information ...... 388 ▫ Engine Oil ...... 372 ▫ Tires — General Information ...... 398 ▫ Engine Oil Filter ...... 373 ▫ Tire Types ...... 404 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...... 373 ▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...... 405 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ...... 374 ▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) ...... 407 ▫ Body Lubrication ...... 375 ▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations ...... 408 ▫ Wiper Blades ...... 375 364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ...... 412 TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...... 410 ▫ Preserving The Bodywork ...... 414 ▫ Treadwear ...... 410 INTERIORS ...... 415 ▫ Traction Grades ...... 410 ▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...... 415 ▫ Temperature Grades ...... 410 ▫ Plastic And Coated Parts...... 416 STORING THE VEHICLE ...... 411 ▫ Leather Parts ...... 417 BODYWORK ...... 412 ▫ Glass Surfaces ...... 417 ▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ...... 412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365 SCHEDULED SERVICING NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter- Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), one year or 350 hours indicator system. The oil change indicator system will of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet scheduled maintenance. customers. Severe Duty All Models Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster. Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of This means that service is required for your vehicle. engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer road environment or is operated predominately at idle or tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- considered Severe Duty. quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- NOTE: 8 tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate under early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your these conditions. vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: miles (805 km). • Check engine oil level. Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator • Check windshield washer fluid level. message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by wear or damage. referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed. further information. • Check function of all interior and exterior lights. 366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Maintenance Plan Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” on the following page for the required maintenance intervals. Required Maintenance Intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: Change oil and filter Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Inspect exhaust system Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 110,000 100,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 If using your vehicle in dusty or off- road conditions, inspect the air XXX X X X X cleaner filter, and replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings, replace if XX X X X X X necessary. 8 Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if XX X X X X X necessary. Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and replace X if necessary. Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X Replace air conditioning/cabin air XX X X X X X filter. Replace spark plugs.* X 368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

* The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, WARNING! (Continued) yearly intervals do not apply. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle WARNING! could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause • You can be badly injured working on or around a an accident. motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

(Continued) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2.4L Engine

1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Battery 9 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Battery 370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Checking Oil Level Adding Washer Fluid To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the regular intervals, such as once a month or before a long reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind- trip. The best time to check the engine oil level is approxi- shield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate mately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has washer fluid. sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some cold will give you an incorrect reading. washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and the wiper blades; this will help blade performance. approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone. information can be found on most washer fluid containers. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at WARNING! the full end of the indicator range. Commercially available windshield washer solvents CAUTION! are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the • Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or washer solution. loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. • Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371 Maintenance-Free Battery CAUTION! Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. • You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte- It is essential when replacing the cables on the nance required. battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the WARNING! negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to posts and free of corrosion. contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. 8 Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. DEALER SERVICE • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera- battery or any other booster source with an output tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to which include detailed service information for your ve- touch each other. hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con- procedure yourself. tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. 372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil WARNING! Identification Symbol You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you This symbol means that the oil has have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you been certified by the American Pe- have any doubt about your ability to perform a service troleum Institute (API). The manu- job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. facturer only recommends API Cer- Engine Oil tified engine oils. This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, Change Engine Oil 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the oils. proper maintenance intervals. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter- CAUTION! vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. for fleet customers. Engine Oil Selection — 2.4L Engine Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec- Standard MS-6395 or equivalent is recommended for all ommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395. temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373 The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and engine oil fill cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, in this section. indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi- environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number or governmental agency for advice on how and where used should not be used. oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. Synthetic Engine Oils Engine Oil Filter You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- every engine oil change. mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are Engine Oil Filter Selection followed. 8 This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos- Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only number should not be used. high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient Materials Added To Engine Oil service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended. The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the Engine Air Cleaner Filter engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. proper maintenance intervals. 374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. maintenance interval if applicable. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

WARNING! WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap- provide a measure of protection in the case of engine proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam- cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap- for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys- near the engine compartment before starting the ve- tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious information kit, for further warranty information. personal injury. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to done by an experienced technician. assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. CAUTION! Air Conditioner Maintenance Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning For best possible performance, your air conditioner should system as the chemicals can damage your air condition- be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the ing components. Such damage is not covered by the start of each warm season. This service should include New Vehicle Limited Warranty. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — proper function. When performing other underhood ser- If Equipped vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performed by an authorized dealer or other service facili- amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock ties using recovery and recycling equipment. Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG Wiper Blades compressor oil and refrigerants. Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the A/C Air Filter windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove See an authorized dealer for service. accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and help reduce 8 Body Lubrication streaking and smearing. Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as dry windshield or rear window. Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica- the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are not tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact and grease should be removed. Particular attention should with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. also be given to hood latching components to ensure 376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

CAUTION! Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged. Windshield Wiper Arm 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position. 1—Wiper 2 — Locking Tab 3—WiperArm SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip 3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the arm up the locking tab. and use one finger push the release tab toward the wiper arm.

Wiper Locking Assembly 1—Wiper Wiper Disengaging 2 — Locking Tab 1 — Locking Tab 2—Wiper 3 — Release Tab

4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm. 378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper Installing The Front Wipers blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the in the full up position. wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade down toward the base of the wiper arm and away from 2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of the the J hook in the end of the wiper arm). wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open. 3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the locking tab. 4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm until it is latched (engagement will be accompanied by an audible click). Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into its locked position. 5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass. Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust 1—Wiper system. 2 — Locking Tab If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; 3 — Wiper Arm J Hook or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; 6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379 have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex- CAUTION! haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective- the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri- and may seriously reduce engine performance and cation or oil change. Replace as required. cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your WARNING! vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv- • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin- Breathing it can make you unconscious and can ued operation of your vehicle with a severe eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer 8 malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information. resulting in possible damage to the converter and • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over vehicle. materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas will not require maintenance. However, it is important to where your exhaust system can contact anything that keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst can burn. operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. 380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning WARNING! (Continued) engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the do not open the hood until the radiator has had time vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. • should be obtained immediately. Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage: fan starts automatically and may start at any time, • Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in whether the engine is running or not. gear and the vehicle is in motion. • When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon- • Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the vehicle. OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode. • Do not idle the engine with any ignition components disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Coolant Checks testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every or malfunctioning operating conditions. 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where Cooling System applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed WARNING! and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If from a garden hose vertically down the face of the con- you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, denser.

(Continued) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381 Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as be added to the system please contact an local authorized soon as possible. dealer. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi- sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032). with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the radiator. proper maintenance intervals. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl- 8 Selection Of Coolant ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica- recommended. tions” for further information. • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop- NOTE: erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci- severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant to be added to the system please contact your local (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may authorized dealer. decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech- nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally 382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Adding Coolant • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti- coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti- reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles cooling system. (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this NOTE: extended maintenance period, it is important that you use • It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to level of protection against freezing according to the MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is Please review these recommendations for using Organic operated. Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop- that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed • We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 to be added to the system, please contact a local autho- Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic rized dealer. Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom- FCA Material Standard MS.90032. mended and can result in cooling system damage. If • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos- (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) sible. are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383 Cooling System Pressure Cap Disposal Of Used Coolant The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu- coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped. community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain- The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. WARNING! Coolant Level • Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over- The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. 8 overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MIN” and do not remove the pressure cap while the system is “MAX” marks. hot or under pressure. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci- the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. 384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Points To Remember • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro- kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming tection of your engine which contains aluminum com- from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally ponents. a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti- hoses are not kinked or obstructed. freeze) to enter the radiator. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is If an examination of your engine compartment shows no equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be condenser clean. safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. bottle must also be protected against freezing. Brake System • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are In order to assure brake system performance, all brake required, the cooling system should be pressure tested system components should be inspected periodically. Refer for leaks. to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385

WARNING! WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi- • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake Specifications” for further information. Using the temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake damage. You would not have your full braking brake system and/or impair its performance. The capacity in an emergency. proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic Brake Master Cylinder master cylinder reservoir. • The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois- performing under hood services or immediately if the ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been “Brake Warning Light” is illuminated. in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin- 8 der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before a open container absorbs moisture from the air removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak- reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be result in a collision. checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to for further information. avoid its contact with these surfaces.

(Continued) 386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Frequency Of Fluid Change WARNING! (Continued) • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri- This could result in a collision. cant has become contaminated with water. NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be Manual Transmission — If Equipped changed immediately. Lubricant Selection Automatic Transmission — If Equipped Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission Selection Of Lubricant fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information. It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use Fluid Level Check only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom- of the hole. mended fluid. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used. Please see your authorized dealer for service. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387 Fluid Level Check CAUTION! The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur- adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis- transmission shift quality and/or torque converter sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni- transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you cal Specifications” for fluid specifications. notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission Special Additives fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an im- The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any proper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis- sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor- CAUTION! mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There- 8 fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed transmissions. occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely adjust the fluid level accurately. affect seals. Fluid And Filter Changes CAUTION! Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as of the vehicle. the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, Tire Markings change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas- sembled for any reason.

RAISING THE VEHICLE In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service station.

TIRES Tire Safety Information Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Markings Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety 4 — Maximum Load Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure 3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389 NOTE: • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the Example: P215/65R15 95H. size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. • • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer- design standards. Tires designed to this standard have gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall section width. The letter P is absent from this tire size preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. 103M. • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into 8 the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. 390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or ....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code – R means radial construction, or – D means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or 8 • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Identification Number (TIN) the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date the tire. code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393 Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In- flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. 8 Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. 394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Loading And Tire Pressure NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Example Tire Placard Location (Door) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395 Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat- ing” section of this manual. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and 8 Tire And Loading Information Placard trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting This placard tells you important information about the: And Operating” section of this manual. 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the tires. weight referenced here. 396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit— this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or Metric Example For Load Limit XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635- 340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. NOTE: (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb table shows examples on how to calculate total load, passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 with varying seating configurations and number and (5x150) = 650 lbs.) size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and carry capacity of your vehicle. cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not • safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load For the following example, the combined weight of capacity calculated in Step 4. occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397

WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. 398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tires — General Information WARNING! (Continued) Tire Pressure • Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas vehicle control. • are affected by improper tire pressure: Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. • Safety and Vehicle Stability • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle • Economy to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right • Tread Wear or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- • Ride Comfort mended cold tire inflation pressure. Safety Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish WARNING! response or over responsiveness in the steering. • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can NOTE: cause collisions. • • Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause in overheating and tire failure. erratic and unpredictable steering response. • Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause vehicle to drift left or right. damage that result in tire failure.

(Continued) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399 Fuel Economy CAUTION! Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture Tread Wear and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal damage the valve stem. wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always for earlier tire replacement. “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum 8 Tire Inflation Pressures inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. At least once a month: • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in may look properly inflated even when they are under- the Winter. inflated. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation 400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which Radial Ply Tires equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. WARNING! Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. build up or your tire pressure will be too low. The instability could cause a collision. Always use Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- Tire Repair tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor- the following criteria: tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading • may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to The tire has not been driven on when flat. an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading (sidewall damage is not repairable). and cold tire inflation pressures. • The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm). WARNING! Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi- Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401 Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Tire Spinning Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer- inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a gency” for further information. Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. WARNING! A Run Flat tire is not repairable. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or mode. failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph 8 See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa- (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when tion. you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth help you in determining when your tires should be re- becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is placed. worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style. • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. • Distance driven. Tire Tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or 1—WornTire higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread 2—NewTire life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403

WARNING! See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this manual for more information Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect You could lose control and have a collision resulting in your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make serious injury or death. sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little original wheels. exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or oil, grease, and gasoline. original equipment dealer with any questions you may Replacement Tires have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the 8 The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu- WARNING! facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when • Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification may change suspension dimensions and perfor- Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer- and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can original equipment tire sidewall. cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering

(Continued) 404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Types WARNING! (Continued) and suspension components. You could lose control All Season Tires — If Equipped and have a collision resulting in serious injury or All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be- ratings approved for your vehicle. tween different all season tires. All season tires can be • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the other than what was originally equipped on your tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose your vehicle. control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad- Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped equate speed capability can result in sudden tire Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi- failure and loss of vehicle control. tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware CAUTION! these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am- Replacing original tires with tires of a different size bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are may result in false speedometer and odometer read- covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an ings. authorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405

WARNING! While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud- could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the using these tire types. possibility of loss of vehicle control. Spare Tires — If Equipped Snow Tires NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a Of Emergency” for further information. “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. CAUTION! If you need snow tires, select tires 8 equivalent in size and type to the origi- Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a in sets of four; failure to do so may compact or limited use temporary spare installed. adversely affect the safety and handling Damage to the vehicle may result. of your vehicle. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what Wheel — If Equipped was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). equivalent in look and function to the original equipment For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. 406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an WARNING! authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 Full Size Spare — If Equipped 103M. The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare your vehicle at the first opportunity. tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. opportunity. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407 Limited Use Spare — If Equipped Tire Chains (Traction Devices) The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear- only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations damage: for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped • Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. recommended by the traction device manufacturer. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle • handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip- Install on front tires only. ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire • For a 215/65R16 tire, use of a snow traction device with and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. a maximum projection of 7 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended. WARNING! • No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire 8 Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal- chain or traction device. lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the WARNING! speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on handling. You could lose control and have a collision. the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. 408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Rotation Recommendations CAUTION! The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the different loads and perform different steering, handling, following precautions: and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at • Because of restricted traction device clearance be- unequal rates. tween tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condi- These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres- damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs sive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires. that could indicate device breakage. Remove the Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, damaged parts of the device before further use. snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, • Install device as tightly as possible and then re- quiet ride. tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte- • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). nance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. • Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). • Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409 The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method is the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation 8 CAUTION! Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should diagram. be followed to balance tire wear. 410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi- TIRE QUALITY GRADES tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt The following tire grading categories were established and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. performance. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the WARNING! tires on your vehicle. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not safety requirements in addition to these grades. include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Treadwear Temperature Grades The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, conditions on a specified government test course. For representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under times as well on the government course as a tire graded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the test wheel. actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart Sustained high temperature can cause the material of significantly from the norm due to variations in driving the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C teristics and climate. corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas- Traction Grades senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411 represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory • Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protec- test wheel, than the minimum required by law. tive waxes. • Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying WARNING! protective waxes. The temperature grade for this tire is established for • Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper blades a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. and leave raised from the glass. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load- • Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care ing, either separately or in combination, can cause not to damage the painted surface by dragging across heat buildup and possible tire failure. dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which will not STORING THE VEHICLE allow the evaporation of moisture present on the surface of the vehicle. If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a • Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) 8 month, observe the following precautions: higher than recommended on the tire placard and check • Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy it periodically. location the windows open slightly. • Do not drain the engine cooling system. • Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged. • Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two • Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery weeks or more, run idle the engine for approximately post and be sure that the battery is fully charged. During five minutes, with the air conditioning system on and storage check battery charge quarterly. high fan speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication of • If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical the system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to system, check the battery charge every 30 days. the compressor when the vehicle is put back into operation. 412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven for cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec- required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting The Engine” tion. in “Starting And Operating” for further information. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis- CAUTION! tance built into your vehicle. Before removal of the positive and negative terminals What Causes Corrosion? to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition switch in the OFF position and close the driver’s door. Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint When reconnecting the positive and negative terminals and protective coatings from your vehicle. to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF The most common causes are: position and the driver’s door is closed. • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. BODYWORK • Stone and gravel impact. Protection From Atmospheric Agents • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- Salt in the air near seacoast localities. graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly Body And Underbody Maintenance corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, Wheel And Wheel Trim Care which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413 and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam- the touch. age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, chrome wheels. etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap CAUTION! to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing. metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is CAUTION! not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 8 Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva- Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic lent is recommended. solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish. extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel the water droplets from the brake components. This activ- Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking. 414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel Clear Coat Wheels wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. Preserving The Bodywork CAUTION! Washing If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash polishing compounds. They will permanently damage soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US- • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is Remover to remove. required to maintain this finish. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your Cleaning Headlights paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore CAUTION! different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To metal and painted surfaces. remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. (Continued) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415 • CAUTION! (Continued) If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) • can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to Special Care match the color of your vehicle. • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near INTERIORS the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. Seats And Fabric Parts • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and carpeting. open. WARNING! • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, 8 touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. considered the responsibility of the owner. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar areas they may cause respiratory harm. cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost If Equipped of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner: • • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well a clean, dry towel. packaged and sealed. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. 416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE • For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild WARNING! soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and • For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. damp towel to remove soap residue. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of must be replaced after a collision if they have been protectants on Stain Repel products. damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). Seat Belt Maintenance Plastic And Coated Parts Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. CAUTION! If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or • lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately. buckles do not work properly. • Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417 Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be needed. used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp CAUTION! cloth. Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone 2. Dry with a soft cloth. based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as Leather Parts damage to the seat may result. Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather Glass Surfaces 8 upholstery. All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your that may scratch the elements. leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. directly on the mirror. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS IDENTIFICATION DATA...... 420 ▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 424 ▫ Vehicle Identification Number ...... 420 ▫ MMT In Gasoline...... 424 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .421 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel ...... 424 ▫ Torque Specifications ...... 421 ▫ Fuel System Cautions ...... 425 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 422 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...... 425 ▫ 2.4L Engine ...... 422 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 426 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline ...... 423 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 427 9 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...... 423 ▫ Engine ...... 427 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles...... 423 ▫ Chassis ...... 428 420 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS IDENTIFICATION DATA Vehicle Identification Number The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the windshield and is visible from the outside of the vehicle. The VIN number also is stamped into the right front body, on the front floor. With the passenger seat in the rear most position, a door in the carpet can be opened to reveal the VIN. It also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title. Right Front Body VIN Location

Vehicle Identification Number TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 421 Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/Bolt Lug Nut/Bolt Torque Size Socket Size 100 Ft-Lbs (135 M12 x 1.25 19 mm N·m) **Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/ bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Opening The VIN Door NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. 9 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall socket.

Wheel Mounting Surface 422 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each WARNING! nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half- To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do way). not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in NOTE: If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them personal injury. checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station. FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2.4L Engine

All available gasoline engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having a octane rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines. While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, Torque Patterns hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use the wheel. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 423 of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause CAUTION! engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these of these blends may result in starting and drivability symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider- problems, damage critical fuel system components, ing service for the vehicle. cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to Reformulated Gasoline illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. ethanol (E-15). Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi- Problems that result from using gasoline containing more cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol quality. are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may 9 The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop- void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War- erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved ranty. performance and durability of engine and fuel system E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles components. Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen- ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War- ates such as ethanol. ranty. 424 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of • Operate in a lean mode. gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal • Poor engine performance. and California reformulated gasoline. • Poor cold start and cold drivability. Materials Added To Fuel • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed have these additives will help improve fuel economy, natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo- Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso- nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are line contains a higher level of detergents not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or to further aide in minimizing engine not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. and fuel system deposits. When avail- MMT In Gasoline able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso- avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 425 varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar CAUTION! (Continued) ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia- phragm materials. additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Fuel System Cautions Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION! NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s you. performance: • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal Carbon Monoxide Warnings law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. WARNING! • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon- overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or 9 oxide poisoning: some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon malfunctioning and may require immediate service. monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance. kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle these products contain high concentrations of metha- is stopped in an open area with the engine running nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation problems resulting from the use of such fuels or system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. (Continued) (Continued) 426 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

WARNING! (Continued) • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric Fuel (Approximate) 2.4 Liter Gasoline Engine 13.5 Gallons 51 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 2.4 Liter Gasoline Engine (SAE 0W- 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters 20, API Certified) Cooling System* 2.4 Liter Gasoline Engine (Mopar 6.8 Quarts 6.5 Liters Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula) * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 427 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 Kilometers) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. Engine Oil – 2.4 Liter Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. 9 Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. Fuel Selection – 2.4 Liter Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol 428 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid. Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (FWD Models) – Use only Mopar AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid, or If Equipped equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission (4WD Models) – Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis- If Equipped sion Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped We recommended you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Syn- thetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5). Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped We recommended you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Syn- thetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5). Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Refrigerant Use Only Refrigerant R134a Charge Amounts: 2.4L Engines — 567g (1.25lb) Compressor Oil Use Only PAG Oil RL-897 2.4L Engines — 135ml (4.56oz) MULTIMEDIA

CONTENTS UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...... 431 ▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ...... 487 DRAG & DROP MENU BAR ...... 431 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS ...... 488 CYBERSECURITY ...... 432 ▫ Introducing Uconnect ...... 488 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...... 434 ▫ Get Started ...... 490 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3 Settings ...... 434 ▫ Basic Voice Commands ...... 490 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — ▫ Radio ...... 491 Uconnect 4 Settings ...... 451 ▫ Media ...... 492 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — 10 ▫ Phone ...... 494 Uconnect 4/4C NAV Settings ...... 465 ▫ Voice Text Reply ...... 495 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ...... 485 ▫ Climate ...... 496 ▫ Radio Operation...... 486 ▫ Navigation (4C NAV) ...... 497 ▫ Media Mode ...... 486 ▫ SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ...... 486 If Equipped ...... 498 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .487 ▫ Register (4C/4C NAV) ...... 499 430 MULTIMEDIA ▫ Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) .....499 ▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped...... 505 ▫ Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) ...... 500 ▫ General Information ...... 506 ▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)...... 501 ▫ Additional Information ...... 506 ▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ...... 502 CD MAINTENANCE ...... 507 ▫ Using Do Not Disturb ...... 503 ▫ Android Auto — If Equipped ...... 504 MULTIMEDIA 431 UCONNECT SYSTEMS For detailed information about your Uconnect system or pairing a phone to your Uconnect system, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.

DRAG & DROP MENU BAR The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps: Uconnect 4 Apps Menu

10 432 MULTIMEDIA CYBERSECURITY Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly. Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Apps Menu unlawful access to your vehicle systems. 1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen. The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent existing shortcut in the main menu bar. version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on installed. the main menu bar. MULTIMEDIA 433 NOTE: WARNING! • FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly • It is not possible to know or to predict all of the regarding software updates. possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are • breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, To help further improve vehicle security and minimize including safety related systems, could be impaired the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may should: result in an accident involving serious injury or • Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/support/ death. software-update.html (U.S. Residents) or www.driveu- • ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into connect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail- your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media able Uconnect software updates. of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious • Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs). increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot breached. be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor- • As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav- mation and private communications without your consent. ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized 10 For further information, refer to ”Data Collection & Pri- dealer immediately. vacy” in your Uconnect Owners Manual Supplement or Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”. 434 MULTIMEDIA UCONNECT SETTINGS Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3 Settings The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle. Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect touchscreen. Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF). Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Buttons On The Your Uconnect system may also have Display Off and back Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate arrow buttons on the faceplate. 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate Push the Display Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the Display Off button on the Push the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display faceplate a second time to turn the screen on. the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out of system allows you to access all of the available program- a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system. mable features. MULTIMEDIA 435 NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in time. the “ON/RUN” position. When making a selection, press the button on the touch- The following tables list the settings that may be found screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired within the Uconnect 3 radio, along with the selectable mode, press and release the preferred setting and make options pertaining to each setting. your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings. Display After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options 10 Display Mode Auto Manual Brightness +- NOTE: The “Brightness” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on the touchscreen. 436 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options Language English Français Español NOTE: Selecting any option within the “Language” setting will change the language for all displayed nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touchscreen Beep Yes No Voice Settings Voice Response Length Show Command List Units After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Units US Metric Custom NOTE: • The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure. • The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L) and “Pressure” (kPa, or bar) units of measure independently. MULTIMEDIA 437 Clock & Date After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour AM PM NOTE: Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time. Set Time Hours +– Set Time Minutes +– Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow NOTE: Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date. 10 Show Time Status — If On Off Equipped Sync Time — If Equipped On Off 438 MULTIMEDIA Safety/Assistance After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options ParkView Backup Camera On Off Delay NOTE: The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. ParkView Backup Camera On Off Active Guide Lines NOTE: The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. MULTIMEDIA 439

Setting Name Selectable Options Forward Collision Warning Far Med Near Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity — If Equipped NOTE: The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles. Forward Collision Warning Off Sound Only Sound and Brake Plus (FCW+) — If Equipped NOTE: The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Sound Only” option is selected a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in 10 front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it will apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you. ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display Rear ParkSense Volume — If Low Medium High Equipped Side Distance Warning Off Sound Only Sound and Display 440 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options Side Distance Warning Vol- Low Med High ume LaneSense Warning — If Early Medium Late Equipped NOTE: The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure. LaneSense Strength — If Low Medium High Equipped Blind Spot Alert — If Off Lights Lights and Chime Equipped NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) not operating to specification. Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — On Off If Equipped MULTIMEDIA 441

Setting Name Selectable Options Electric Park Brake Service Yes No Mode NOTE: The “Electric Park Brake Service Mode” feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.). Brakes — If Equipped After pressing the “Brakes” button on the touchscreen the following setting will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Auto Park Brake On Off 10 442 MULTIMEDIA Lights After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Headlight Sensitivity — If Level 1: minimum Level 2: medium sen- Level 3: maximum sensitivity Equipped sensitivity sitivity NOTE: The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec NOTE: When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. Greeting Lights On Off Automatic High Beam Head- On Off lamps — If Equipped Daytime Running Lights On Off MULTIMEDIA 443

Setting Name Selectable Options Cornering Lights On Off NOTE: When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night. Flash Lights With Lock — If On Off Equipped Interior Ambient Lights +- NOTE: The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on the touchscreen. Doors & Locks After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: 10

Setting Name Selectable Options Auto Unlock On Exit On Off NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. 444 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options Flash Lights With Lock On Off Horn With Lock On Off Horn With Remote Start — If On Off Equipped Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock Driver All NOTE: When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob). Memory Linked To FOB — If On Off Equipped NOTE: This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. MULTIMEDIA 445

Setting Name Selectable Options Auto Door Locks On Off NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort Systems” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Off Remote Start All Starts Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped NOTE: When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when 10 temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn on. 446 MULTIMEDIA Engine Off Options After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec NOTE: When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min NOTE: When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a preset time after the ignition key is turned to STOP/OFF. MULTIMEDIA 447 Audio After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Equalizer Bass Mid Treble NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting. Balance/Fade Up Arrow Down Ar- Left Arrow Right Ar- Center “C” Button row Button Button row Button Button NOTE: 10 When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button” on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3 Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off 448 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options Loudness On Off NOTE: The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled. AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped +- NOTE: The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Phone/Bluetooth After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Paired Phones List of Paired Phones NOTE: This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. MULTIMEDIA 449 SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Channel Skip List of Channels NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip. Subscription Info Sirius ID NOTE: New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. 10 1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen. 2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online. 450 MULTIMEDIA Restore Settings After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Restore Settings OK Cancel NOTE: When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. Clear Personal Data After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Clear Personal Data OK Cancel NOTE: When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. MULTIMEDIA 451 Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4 Press the “Settings” button on the bottom bar, or press the Settings “Apps ” button, then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the available programmable features. NOTE: • Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time. • Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary. When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Buttons On The either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to 10 Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings. The following tables list the settings that may be found within the Uconnect 4 with 7-inch display radio, along with the selectable options pertaining to each setting. 452 MULTIMEDIA Language After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Language English Espanol Francais Display After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Display Mode Auto Manual Display Brightness Headlights On +- Display Brightness Headlights Off +- AutoShow On Off Touchscreen Beep On Off Control Screen Timeout On Off Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off MULTIMEDIA 453 Units After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Units US Metric Custom NOTE: • The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure. • The “Custom” option allows setting the “Distance, Fuel Consumption” (MPG (US), MPG(UK), L/100km, or km/ L),“Pressure” (kPa, or bar) and “Temperature” (C, or F) units of measure independently. Voice After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: 10 Setting Name Selectable Options Voice Response Length Brief Detailed Show Command List Always With Help Never 454 MULTIMEDIA Time & Date After pressing the “Time & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Set Time Hours +- NOTE: The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. Set Time Minutes +- NOTE: The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. Time Format 12hrs 24hrs AM PM Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow NOTE: Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date. Show Time Status — If Equipped On Off Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off MULTIMEDIA 455 Safety/Driving Assistance — If Equipped After pressing the “Safety/Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Forward Collision Warning Off Warning Only Warning + Active Brake NOTE: The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Sound Only” option is selected a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it will apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you. Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped Near Medium Far 10 NOTE: The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles. 456 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options Auto Park Brake On Off Brake Service Yes No NOTE: Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether you would like to retract the park brakes to allow brake system service. MULTIMEDIA 457 Lights After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Interior Ambient Lights +- NOTE: The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on the touchscreen. Headlight Sensitivity — If Level 1: minimum Level 2: medium sen- Level 3: maximum sensitivity Equipped sensitivity sitivity NOTE: The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). 10 Headlight Off Delay +- NOTE: When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. Greeting Lights On Off 458 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options Auto Dim High Beams — If On Off Equipped Cornering Lights On Off NOTE: When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night. Flash Lights With Lock — If On Off Equipped Doors & Locks After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Personal Settings Linked To Key On Off Fob — If Equipped

Setting Name Selectable Options Auto Door Locks On Off NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Engine Off Options — If Equipped After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options 10 Headlight Off Delay +- Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min Radio Off With Door On Off 460 MULTIMEDIA Audio After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Balance & Fade +- NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Balance & Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon” toward any location in the box. Equalizer Bass Mid Treble NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting. Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3 Loudness On Off NOTE: The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled. MULTIMEDIA 461

Setting Name Selectable Options AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped +- NOTE: This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Auto Play On Off NOTE: The “Auto Play” feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on. Radio Off With Door On Off NOTE: The “Radio Off With Door” feature will keep the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened, or when the “Radio Off Delay” selected time has expired.

10 462 MULTIMEDIA Phone After pressing the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Do Not Disturb Do Not Distrurb Options Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices NOTE: This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Channel Skip List Of Channels NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip. MULTIMEDIA 463

Setting Name Selectable Options Subscription Info Sirius ID NOTE: New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. 1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen. 2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online. Restore Settings After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: 10 Setting Name Selectable Options Restore Settings OK Cancel NOTE: When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings. 464 MULTIMEDIA Clear Personal Data After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Clear Personal Data OK Cancel NOTE: When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. MULTIMEDIA 465 Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect Press the “Apps ” button, then press the “Settings 4/4C NAV Settings ” button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the available programmable features. NOTE: • Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time. • Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary. When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Buttons On return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the 10 The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings. The following tables list the settings that may be found within the Uconnect 4/4C NAV radio, along with the selectable options pertaining to each setting. 466 MULTIMEDIA Language After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Set Language On Off NOTE: When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Espa- ñol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected. MULTIMEDIA 467 Display After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Display Mode Manual Auto Display Brightness With +- Headlights ON NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions. Display Brightness With +- Headlights OFF

NOTE: 10 To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions. Set Theme Options On Off NOTE: When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected. 468 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options Touchscreen Beep On Off Control Screen Time-Out On Off NOTE: When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed. Navigation Turn-By-Turn In On Off Cluster NOTE: When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the In- strument Cluster Display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. Phone Pop-ups Displayed in On Off Cluster MULTIMEDIA 469 Units After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Units US Metric Custom NOTE: • The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure. • The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L), “Pressure” (kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measure independently. Voice After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: 10 Setting Name Selectable Options Voice Response Length Brief Detailed Show Command List Always With Help Never 470 MULTIMEDIA Clock After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off Set Time Hours +- NOTE: The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. Set Time Minutes +- NOTE: The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. Time Format 12hrs 24hrs Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off MULTIMEDIA 471 Safety & Driving Assistance After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped Near Medium Far NOTE: The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles. Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) Off Sound Only Sound and Brake NOTE: The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies ad- 10 ditional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Sound Only” option is selected a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it will apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you. 472 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Medium Late NOTE: The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure. ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification. ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines On Off ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off NOTE: The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. MULTIMEDIA 473

Setting Name Selectable Options Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off Side Distance Warning Off Sound Sound and Dis- play Side Distance Warning Volume Low Med High Brakes After pressing the “Brakes” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Electric Park Brake Service Mode — Yes No If Equipped NOTE: This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system, 10 to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.). Auto Park Brake On Off 474 MULTIMEDIA Lights After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Headlight Sensitivity Level 1: minimum Level 2: medium Level 3: maximum sensitivity sensitivity sensitivity NOTE: The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec NOTE: When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. Headlight Illumination On 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec Approach MULTIMEDIA 475

Setting Name Selectable Options Greeting Lights On Off Daytime Running Lights On Off Cornering Lights On Off NOTE: When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night. Flash Lights With Lock — If On Off Equipped Interior Ambient Lights +- NOTE: The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on the touchscreen. Auto Dim High Beams — If On Off 10 Equipped NOTE: When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. 476 MULTIMEDIA Doors & Locks After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Auto Unlock On Exit On Off NOTE: When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position, and the driver’s door is opened. Flash Lights With Lock On Off Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press Sound Horn With Remote Start — If On Off Equipped MULTIMEDIA 477

Setting Name Selectable Options 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors NOTE: When Driver Door is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock, no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob). Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off NOTE: This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock 10 buttons. Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If On Off Equipped NOTE: The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. 478 MULTIMEDIA Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort Systems” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel Off Remote Start All Starts With Vehicle Start — If Equipped NOTE: When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on. Engine Off Options After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Headlight Off Delay +- MULTIMEDIA 479 Radio After pressing the Radio” on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min NOTE: When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for 20 minutes, or until the first door is opened after the engine is shut off. Audio After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options 10 Balance/Fade Speaker Icon NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon” toward any location in the box. 480 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options Equalizer Bass Mid Treble NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting. Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3 Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped +- NOTE: This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Phone/Bluetooth After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Do Not Disturb List of Settings NOTE: Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message). MULTIMEDIA 481

Setting Name Selectable Options Paired Phones List Of Paired Phones NOTE: This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. Paired Audio Sources List Of Paired Audio Sources NOTE: This feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options 10 Channel Skip List Of Channels NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip. 482 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options Subscription Info Sirius ID NOTE: New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. 1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen. 2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online. SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription. Radio Setup — If Equipped After pressing the “Radio Setup” button (if equipped) on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Traffic Announcement On Off NOTE: Allows the system to pause the radio or a media device to issue a traffic bulletin. MULTIMEDIA 483

Setting Name Selectable Options Alternative Frequency On Off NOTE: Allows the frequency to change automatically to maintain the strongest signal. Regional On Off NOTE: Forces the system to select from a network station when the system is present in a different region. Restore Settings After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Restore Settings OK Cancel NOTE: 10 When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings. 484 MULTIMEDIA Clear Personal Data After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Clear Personal Data OK Cancel NOTE: When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. System Information After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options Software Licenses Software Information Screen NOTE: When this feature is selected, a “Licensing Information” screen will appear, displaying a licensing information website for the radio. MULTIMEDIA 485

Setting Name Selectable Options Map Update Download System Information To Generate Request Code USB NOTE: The “Download System Information To USB” will create a special USB required for Map updates of the radio. Whereas the “Generate Request Code” will display a code for the user to input online when downloading the maps. STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a The remote sound system controls are located on the rear push-button in the center and controls the volume and surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker positions. switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM etc.). The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push- 10 button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode.

Remote Sound System Controls 486 MULTIMEDIA Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button. Media Mode Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the Center Console USB Port current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to 1 — USB Port play. 2 — AUX Jack

If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the If equipped, there may also be another USB port (charge second track; three times, it plays the third, etc. only) located on the back of the center console. AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL There is a USB and AUX Jack in the center console. This feature allows an external device to be plugged into the USB or AUX ports. MULTIMEDIA 487 Regulatory And Safety Information USA/CANADA Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body. The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com- Charge Only USB Port munity. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire- 10 Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not before turning on the wireless radio. satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped). 488 MULTIMEDIA The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio • If this equipment does cause harmful interference to Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: radio or television reception, which can be determined This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour- with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of Operation is subject to the following two conditions: the following measures: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 1. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired opera- 2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio tion. technician for help. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS by the party responsible for compliance could void the Introducing Uconnect user’s authority to operate the equipment. Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful NOTE: quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips • This equipment has been tested and found to comply you need to know to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4, with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to or Uconnect 4/4C NAV system. Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. MULTIMEDIA 489

Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display

Uconnect 4/4C NAV 10 If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps menus, of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4 with 8.4-inch display system.

Uconnect 4 490 MULTIMEDIA Get Started All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel. Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition: 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. 2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver- sations are examples of noise that may impact recognition. 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing Uconnect Voice Command Buttons straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the 1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive rearview mirror and aimed at the driver. A Text 2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media, or Climate Func- 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first tions. For 8.4–inch System Only: Push To Begin Navigation Function push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button, 3 — Push To End Call wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command. Basic Voice Commands 5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any Command from current category. point while using your Uconnect system. Push the VR button . After the beep, say: • “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session MULTIMEDIA 491 • “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands • “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen. Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip- tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) Push the VR button . After the beep, say: • “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM” Uconnect 3 Radio • “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1” TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say 10 “ Help.” The system provides you with a list of commands.

Uconnect 4 Radio 492 MULTIMEDIA Media Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.) Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist. • “ Change source to Bluetooth” • “ Change source to AUX” • “ Change source to USB” • “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”; “ Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical” Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed. MULTIMEDIA 493

Uconnect 3 Media

Uconnect 4/4C NAV Media 10

Uconnect 4 Media 494 MULTIMEDIA Phone Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions. Push the VR button and the Phone button. After the beep, say one of the following commands: • “ Call John Smith” • “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts” • “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)” Uconnect 3 Phone • “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)” TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the VR button and the Phone button and say “ Call,” then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “ Call John Smith work.”

Uconnect 4 Phone MULTIMEDIA 495 2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later. Start without No. I’ll be late. me. Okay. Where are you? I will be Are you there Call me. yet? minutes late. I need I’ll call you later. See you in directions. of I’m on my way. Can’t talk right minutes. I’m lost. now. Thanks. Uconnect 4/4C NAV Phone 10 Voice Text Reply TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the this feature. For details about MAP, visit Phone or VR button and say “ Listen.” (Must have UconnectPhone.com. compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.) 1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone or VR button . After the beep, say: “ Reply.” 496 MULTIMEDIA Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming Climate text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free iPhone, follow these four simple steps: and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.) Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands: • “ Set driver temperature to 70 degrees” • “ Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”

iPhone Notification Settings 1 — Select “Settings” 2 — Select “Bluetooth” 3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle 4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”

TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message. MULTIMEDIA 497 TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate 10 Navigation (4C NAV) The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to Uconnect 4 Climate get to where you want to go. 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the beep, say: “ Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.” 498 MULTIMEDIA 2. Then follow the system prompts. SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If Equipped TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button . After CAUTION! the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.” Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.

NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian, press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV touchscreen to get started. NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details. Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation SOS Call Theft Alarm Notification Remote Door Lock/Unlock MULTIMEDIA 499 Send & Go 3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate ser- Vehicle Finder vices in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate Stolen Vehicle Assistance on the web. Remote Vehicle Start** • U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian. Remote Horn & Lights • Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/guardian. Roadside Assistance Call Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) Vehicle Health Reports** Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which Vehicle Health Alert** summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs Performance Pages Plus** if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Your vehicle **If vehicle is equipped. will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects issues with its key systems that need your attention. For Register (4C/4C NAV) further information, refer to your owner’s manual. To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your 10 vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian services. 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle touchscreen. 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps. 500 MULTIMEDIA Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) To use the Uconnect Mobile App: You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands • Once you have registered your SiriusXM Guardian and sending a destination from your phone to your vehicle. services, download the Uconnect App to your mobile device. Use your Owner Account login and password to open the app. • Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped. • Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle Finder and Send & Go , if equipped. • Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settings. Mobile App NOTE: For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). MULTIMEDIA 501 SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not available for Uconnect 4 system.) Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands: • “ Show fuel prices” • “ Show 5 - day weather forecast” • “ Show extended weather” TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.

SiriusXM Travel Link 10 502 MULTIMEDIA Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and re- sponds back to confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks. To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages and many other useful requests.

Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available MULTIMEDIA 503 Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail. Automatic reply messages can be: • “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” • Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being inter- rupted by incoming calls. NOTE: • Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen on the touchscreen. • Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones. 10 Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free • Auto reply with text message is only available on Available phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP. Using Do Not Disturb With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb. 504 MULTIMEDIA Android Auto — If Equipped Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory- provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which Android Auto On 7-inch Display recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features: • Maps • Music • Phone • Text Messages • Additional Apps MULTIMEDIA 505 the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features: • Phone • Music • Messages • Maps • Additional Apps

Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display 10 Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information. Apple CarPlay — If Equipped Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display 506 MULTIMEDIA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Additional Information © 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. further information. For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 General Information (24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Resi- Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: dents). MULTIMEDIA 507 CD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD in good condition, take the following precautions: 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface. 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become 10 too high. NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE ...... 510 Impaired (TDD/TTY) ...... 511 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment ...... 510 ▫ Service Contract ...... 512 ▫ Prepare A List ...... 510 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...... 513 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ...... 510 MOPARPARTS...... 513 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 510 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...... 513 ▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ...... 511 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .513 ▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...... 511 ▫ In Canada ...... 513 ▫ In Mexico Contact ...... 511 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...... 514 11 ▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands...... 511 510 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally Prepare For The Appointment interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services. If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho- Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. can often provide a clue to the current problem. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest Prepare A List information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the timely manner. specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service advisor know. service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. Be Reasonable With Requests • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the If you list a number of items and you must have your general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the They want to know if you need assistance. service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center. at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 511 Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center In Mexico Contact should include the following information: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 • Owner’s name and address Sante Fe C.P. 05109 • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) Mexico, D. F. • Authorized dealer name In Mexico City: 5081-7568 • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 • Vehicle delivery date and mileage Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands FCA US LLC Customer Center FCA Caribbean LLC P.O. Box 21–8004 P.O. Box 191857 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 San Juan 00919-1857 Phone: (877) 426-5337 Phone: (877) 426-5337 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center Fax: (787) 782-3345 P.O. Box 1621 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech 11 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Impaired (TDD/TTY) Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica- tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access 512 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the responsible for any service contract other than the manu- United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by documents, and contact the person listed in those docu- Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for ments. Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has Service Contract also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu- concerns. facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions WARNING! and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), questions about the service contract, call the manufactur- some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo- er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800- nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of 521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other (800) 387-9983 French). reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not (Continued) CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 513

WARNING! (Continued) If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved reproductive harm. in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. WARRANTY INFORMATION To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin- vehicle and market. istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain MOPAR PARTS other information about motor vehicle safety from Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail- http://www.safercar.gov. able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for In Canada your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best. If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department imme- REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety 11 In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http:// cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/. immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC. 514 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Owner’s Manuals To order the following manuals, you may use either the These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master- assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are Service Manuals starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in Call toll free at: diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain- • 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A • 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language Or with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: Diagnostic Procedure Manuals • www.techauthority.com (U.S.) Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. INDEX

12 516 INDEX Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 382 Air Pressure Additives, Fuel ...... 424 Tires...... 399 AirBag...... 183 Alarm Air Bag Operation ...... 185 Arm The System ...... 32 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 182, 186 Disarm The System ...... 32 Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 193 Security Alarm ...... 122 Enhanced Accident Response ...... 198 Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 32 Enhanced Accident Response ...... 361 Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...... 32 Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...... 361 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...... 7 FrontAirBag...... 186 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 381, 426 If Deployment Occurs ...... 197 Disposal ...... 383 Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 192 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 136 Maintaining Your Air Bag System ...... 201 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...... 122, 126 Maintenance ...... 201 Arming System (Security Alarm) ...... 32 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ...... 183 Assist, Hill Start ...... 146 Side Air Bags ...... 193 Audio Systems (Radio)...... 431 Transporting Pets ...... 218 Auto Down Power Windows ...... 82 Air Bag Light ...... 118,182, 220 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...... 52 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)...... 373 Automatic Door Locks...... 38 Air Conditioner Maintenance ...... 374 Automatic Headlights ...... 59 Air Conditioning Filter ...... 80, 375 Automatic High Beams ...... 58 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...... 79 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...... 78 Air Conditioning Refrigerant ...... 374, 375 Automatic Transaxle ...... 241 Air Conditioning System...... 78, 374 Automatic Transmission ...... 243, 387 Air Filter ...... 373 Adding Fluid ...... 387, 428 INDEX 517 Fluid And Filter Changes ...... 387 Parking ...... 232 Fluid Change ...... 387 Warning Light ...... 118 Fluid Level Check ...... 386, 387 Brake/Transmission Interlock ...... 243 Fluid Type ...... 386, 428 Brightness, Interior Lights...... 61, 62 Special Additives ...... 387 Bulb Replacement ...... 305 Auto Unlock, Doors ...... 38 Bulbs, Light ...... 222 Auto Up Power Windows ...... 82 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ...... 97 Camera, Rear ...... 275 Auxiliary Power Outlet ...... 97 Capacities, Fluid ...... 426 Axle Fluid ...... 428 Caps, Filler Axle Lubrication ...... 428 Fuel ...... 277 Oil (Engine) ...... 369, 372 Battery...... 120, 371 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...... 383 Charging System Light ...... 120 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 219, 425 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ...... 21 Cargo Area Features ...... 92 Belts, Seat ...... 220 Cargo Load Floor ...... 92 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 148 Cargo Tie-Downs ...... 92, 94 Body Mechanism Lubrication ...... 375 Car Washes...... 414 B-Pillar Location ...... 394 Cellular Phone ...... 487 Brake Assist System...... 138 Certification Label ...... 279 12 Brake Control System, Electronic...... 137 Chains, Tire ...... 407 Brake Fluid ...... 428 Change Oil Indicator ...... 107 Brake System ...... 384 Changing A Flat Tire ...... 330, 388 Fluid Check ...... 385, 428 Chart, Tire Sizing...... 390 Master Cylinder ...... 385 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .132 518 INDEX Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...... 218 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ...... 486 Checks, Safety...... 218 Console ...... 95 Child Restraint ...... 202 Console, Floor ...... 95 Child Restraints Contract, Service ...... 512 Booster Seats ...... 206 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...... 383 Child Seat Installation ...... 215 Cooling System ...... 380 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ...... 213 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 382 Infants And Child Restraints ...... 204 Coolant Capacity ...... 426 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ...... 208 Coolant Level ...... 380, 383 Older Children And Child Restraints ...... 205 Disposal Of Used Coolant ...... 383 Seating Positions ...... 207 Drain, Flush, And Refill ...... 381 Child Safety Locks ...... 39 Inspection ...... 383 Clean Air Gasoline ...... 423 Points To Remember ...... 384 Cleaning Pressure Cap ...... 383 Wheels ...... 412 Radiator Cap ...... 383 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 375 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 381, 426, 427 Climate Control ...... 67 Corrosion Protection ...... 412 Manual ...... 67 Cruise Light...... 128, 129, 130 Coin Holder ...... 95 Cupholders ...... 96 Cold Weather Operation...... 228 Customer Assistance ...... 510 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance...... 507 Customer Programmable Features...... 434 Compact Spare Tire ...... 406 Cybersecurity ...... 432 Computer, Trip/Travel ...... 117 Connector Daytime Running Lights ...... 57 UCI...... 486 Dealer Service ...... 371 INDEX 519 Defroster, Windshield...... 220 Emergency, In Case Of Diagnostic System, Onboard ...... 131 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 299 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...... 57, 58 Jacking ...... 330, 388 Dipsticks Jump Starting ...... 350 Oil (Engine) ...... 370 Overheating ...... 353 Disabled Vehicle Towing ...... 357 Tow Hooks ...... 359 Disposal Towing ...... 357 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 383 Emission Control System Maintenance...... 132 Disturb...... 503 Engine ...... 369 Door Ajar...... 120, 121 Air Cleaner ...... 373 Door Ajar Light ...... 120, 121 Block Heater ...... 230 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ...... 41 Break-In Recommendations ...... 231 Driver’s Seat Tilt Back ...... 40 Checking Oil Level ...... 370 Driving...... 291 Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 427 Cooling ...... 380 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ...... 97 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 219, 425 Electric Brake Control System Fails To Start ...... 229 Anti-Lock Brake System ...... 136 Flooded, Starting ...... 229 Electric Parking Brake ...... 232 Jump Starting ...... 350 Electronic Brake Control System ...... 137 Oil...... 372, 426, 427 12 Traction Control System ...... 137 Oil Filler Cap ...... 369, 372 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 259 Oil Filter ...... 373 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 139 Oil Selection ...... 372, 426 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 120 Oil Synthetic ...... 373 520 INDEX Overheating ...... 353 Fluid Leaks...... 222 Starting ...... 226 Fluid Level Checks Engine Oil Viscosity...... 372 Brake ...... 385 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...... 372 Engine Oil ...... 370 Enhanced Accident Response Feature ...... 198, 361 Fluids And Lubricants ...... 427 Ethanol...... 423 Fog Lights...... 57, 60 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 425 Folding Rear Seat ...... 46 Exhaust Gas Cautions ...... 219 Folding Rear Seats ...... 40 Exhaust System ...... 219, 378 Forward Collision Warning...... 156 Exterior Lighting...... 57 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...... 355 Exterior Lights ...... 57, 222 Fuel ...... 422 Additives ...... 424 Filters Clean Air ...... 423 Air Cleaner ...... 373 Ethanol ...... 423 Air Conditioning ...... 80, 375 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...... 277 Engine Oil ...... 373, 427 Gasoline ...... 422 Engine Oil Disposal ...... 373 Light ...... 123 Flashers Materials Added ...... 424 Hazard Warning ...... 299 Methanol ...... 423 Turn Signal ...... 57, 60, 129, 222 Octane Rating ...... 422, 427 Flash-To-Pass ...... 57, 59 Specifications ...... 427 Flooded Engine Starting ...... 229 Tank Capacity ...... 426 Floor Console ...... 95 Fuses ...... 319 Fluid, Brake ...... 428 Fluid Capacities...... 426 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...... 277 INDEX 521 Gasoline, Clean Air ...... 423 Hill Descent Control ...... 144 Gasoline (Fuel) ...... 422 Hill Descent Control Indicator ...... 144 Gasoline, Reformulated ...... 423 Hill Start Assist ...... 146 Gear Ranges...... 238, 245 Holder, Coin...... 95 Gear Select Lever Override...... 354 Holder, Cup ...... 96 Glass Cleaning ...... 417 Hood Prop ...... 87 Gross Axle Weight Rating...... 282 Hood Release ...... 87 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...... 281 GVWR ...... 279 Inside Rearview Mirror ...... 52, 299 Instrument Cluster ...... 102, 104 Hazard Warning Flasher...... 299 Instrument Cluster ...... 107 Headlights Instrument Cluster Display Automatic ...... 59 Information Display ...... 108 Cleaning ...... 414 Instrument Cluster Display ...... 105 Delay ...... 57, 59 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...... 417 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...... 57, 58 Interior Appearance Care ...... 415 Lights On Reminder ...... 57, 60 Interior Fuses ...... 326 Passing ...... 57, 59 Interior Lights...... 61 Switch ...... 57 Introduction ...... 4 Time Delay ...... 57, 59 Inverter, Power ...... 99 12 Head Restraints ...... 47 iPod/USB/MP3 Control...... 486 Head Rests ...... 47 Heated Mirrors ...... 52, 55 Jacking Instructions ...... 333 Heater, Engine Block ...... 230 Jack Location ...... 331 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . .57, 58 Jack Operation ...... 330, 333, 388 522 INDEX Jump Starting ...... 350 AirBag...... 118,182, 220 Automatic Headlights ...... 59 KeyFob...... 19 Battery Saver ...... 57, 61 Arm The Alarm ...... 32 Brake Assist Warning ...... 143 Disarm The Alarm ...... 32 Brake Warning ...... 118 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...... 23, 31 Bulb Replacement ...... 305 Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....21 Cruise ...... 128, 129, 130 Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ...... 23 Daytime Running ...... 57 Key-In Reminder...... 26 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...... 57, 58 Keyless Enter-N-Go...... 34 Engine Temperature Warning ...... 121 Key, Replacement...... 23, 31 Exterior ...... 222 Keys ...... 19 Fog...... 60 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 299 Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 57, 60 Headlights ...... 57 Lane Change Assist ...... 57, 61 Headlights On Reminder ...... 57, 60 LaneSense...... 268 Headlight Switch ...... 57 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 169 High Beam ...... 57, 58 Latches...... 222 High Beam/Low Beam Select ...... 57, 58 Hood ...... 87 Hill Descent Control Indicator ...... 144 Leaks, Fluid ...... 222 Instrument Cluster ...... 57 Life Of Tires ...... 402 Intensity Control ...... 61, 62 Liftgate ...... 89, 90 Interior ...... 61 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...... 66 Lights On Reminder ...... 57, 60 Light Bulbs ...... 222 Low Fuel ...... 123 Lights...... 222 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ...... 123 INDEX 523 Park ...... 129 Lug Nuts ...... 421 Passing ...... 57, 59 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 121 Maintenance Free Battery ...... 371 Security Alarm ...... 122 Maintenance Schedule ...... 365 Service ...... 305 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .123, 132 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...... 125, 159 Manual, Service...... 514 Traction Control ...... 143 Manual Transmission ...... 237, 386 Turn Signal ...... 57, 58, 60, 129, 222 Fluid Level Check ...... 386 Vanity Mirror ...... 56 Frequency Of Fluid Change ...... 386 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ...... 121 Lubricant Selection ...... 386 Load Floor, Cargo ...... 92 Shift Speeds ...... 238 Loading Vehicle...... 279 Master Cylinder (Brakes) ...... 385 Tires...... 394 Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ...... 40 Load Shed Memory Seat ...... 40 Battery Saver Mode ...... 115 Memory Seats And Radio ...... 40 Battery Saver On ...... 115 Methanol ...... 423 Electrical Load Reduction ...... 115 Mini-Trip Computer...... 117 Intelligent Battery Sensor ...... 115 Mirrors ...... 52 Locks Automatic Dimming ...... 52 Auto Unlock ...... 38 Heated ...... 52, 55 12 Child Protection ...... 39 Outside ...... 52, 53 Power Door ...... 34 Rearview ...... 52, 299 Low Tire Pressure System...... 159 Vanity ...... 56 Lubrication, Body ...... 375 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...... 7 Luggage Carrier ...... 99 Monitor, Tire Pressure System...... 159 524 INDEX Mopar Parts ...... 513 Operating Precautions ...... 131 Multi-Function Control Lever ...... 57, 58 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...... 5 Outside Rearview Mirrors...... 52, 53 New Vehicle Break-In Period ...... 231 Overheating, Engine ...... 353 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...... 5,514 Occupant Restraints...... 167 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ...... 422, 427 Paddle Shifters ...... 248 Oil, Engine...... 372, 427 Paint Care...... 412 Capacity ...... 426 Parking Brake ...... 232 Change Interval ...... 372 ParkSense System, Rear ...... 261 Checking ...... 370 Pets ...... 218 Dipstick ...... 370 Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...... 394 Disposal ...... 373 Power Filter ...... 373, 427 Door Locks ...... 34 Filter Disposal ...... 373 Inverter ...... 99 Identification Logo ...... 372 Lift Gate ...... 90 Materials Added To ...... 373 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...... 97 Pressure Warning Light ...... 121 Sunroof ...... 84 Recommendation ...... 372, 426 Windows ...... 81 Synthetic ...... 373 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...... 178 Viscosity ...... 372, 426 Preparation For Jacking ...... 333 Oil Filter, Change ...... 373 Pretensioners Oil Filter, Selection...... 373 Seat Belts ...... 179 Oil Pressure Light ...... 121 Onboard Diagnostic System ...... 131 Radial Ply Tires ...... 400 INDEX 525 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)...... 383 Uconnect Customer Programmable Features ...... 29 Radio Frequency Uconnect Settings ...... 29 General Information ...... 24, 30, 31 Replacement Keys ...... 23, 31 Radio Operation ...... 487 Replacement Tires ...... 403 Radio Remote Controls ...... 485 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 513 Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...... 65 Restraints, Child ...... 202 Rear Camera ...... 275 Restraints, Head ...... 47 Rear Cross Path...... 153 Roll Over Warning ...... 4 Rear ParkSense System ...... 261 Roof Type Carrier ...... 99 Rear Seat, Folding ...... 46 Rotation, Tires...... 408 Rear Seats, Folding ...... 40 Rear Wiper/Washer...... 66 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle...... 220 Recreational Towing...... 290 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...... 222 Reformulated Gasoline...... 423 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 513 Refrigerant ...... 375 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...... 219 Release, Hood...... 87 Safety Information, Tire ...... 388 Reminder, Lights On ...... 57, 60 Safety Tips ...... 218 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 168 Schedule, Maintenance...... 365 Remote Keyless Entry Seat Belt Arm The Alarm ...... 32 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ...... 173 12 Disarm The Alarm ...... 32 Energy Management Feature ...... 179 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...... 23, 31 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ...... 171 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ...... 485 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 169 Remote Starting Pregnant Women ...... 178 Exit Remote Start Mode ...... 28 Seat Belt Extender ...... 177 526 INDEX Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 179 Seatback Release ...... 40, 41, 42, 46 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 168 Tilting ...... 40, 41 Seat Belt Maintenance ...... 416 Vented ...... 40 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 168 Ventilated ...... 40 Seat Belts ...... 168, 220 Security Alarm ...... 32, 122 Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...... 173 Arm The System ...... 32 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ...... 173 Disarm The System ...... 32 Child Restraints ...... 202 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 427 Extender ...... 177 Sentry Key Front Seat ...... 168, 169, 171 Key Programming ...... 31 Inspection ...... 220 Sentry Key Replacement ...... 23, 31 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...... 173 Service Assistance ...... 510 Operating Instructions ...... 171 Service Contract ...... 512 Pregnant Women ...... 178 Service Manuals ...... 514 Pretensioners ...... 179 Shifting Rear Seat ...... 169 Automatic Transmission ...... 243 Reminder ...... 121 Manual Transmission ...... 237 Untwisting Procedure ...... 173 Shift Lever Override ...... 354 Seats...... 40, 45 Shoulder Belts...... 169 Adjustment ...... 40 Side View Mirror Adjustment ...... 52, 53 Easy Entry ...... 40 Signals, Turn ...... 57, 60, 129, 222 Head Restraints ...... 47 Siri...... 502 Heated ...... 40, 45 SiriusXM Guardian Memory ...... 40 Vehicle Health Alert ...... 499 Rear Folding ...... 40, 46 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...... 407 INDEX 527 Snow Tires ...... 405 Storage, Vehicle...... 79 Spare Tire ...... 405 Stuck, Freeing ...... 355 Spare Tires...... 405, 406, 407 Sun Roof ...... 84 Spark Plugs ...... 427 Sun Visor Extension ...... 56 Specifications Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag ...... 183 Fuel (Gasoline) ...... 427 Sway Control, Trailer ...... 147 Oil...... 427 Synthetic Engine Oil ...... 373 Speed Control Accel/Decel ...... 261 Telescoping Steering Column ...... 50 Cancel ...... 261 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ...... 78 Resume ...... 261 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...... 92, 94 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 259 Tilt Steering Column ...... 50 Starting ...... 226 Time Delay, Headlight ...... 57, 59 Automatic Transmission ...... 227 Tire And Loading Information Placard...... 394 Cold Weather ...... 228 Tire Markings ...... 388 Engine Fails To Start ...... 229 Tires...... 222, 398, 405, 410 Starting And Operating ...... 226 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 402 Starting Procedures ...... 226 Air Pressure ...... 398 Steering Chains ...... 407 Column Controls ...... 57, 58 Changing ...... 330, 388 12 Tilt Column ...... 50 Compact Spare ...... 406 Wheel, Heated ...... 50, 51 General Information ...... 398, 405 Wheel, Tilt ...... 50 High Speed ...... 400 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...... 485 Inflation Pressure ...... 399 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .485 Jacking ...... 330, 388 528 INDEX Life Of Tires ...... 402 Recreational ...... 290 Load Capacity ...... 394, 395 Weight ...... 283 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 125 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...... 290 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...... 159 Traction Control ...... 137 Quality Grading ...... 410 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...... 147 Radial ...... 400 Trailer Towing...... 281 Replacement ...... 403 Cooling System Tips ...... 289 Rotation ...... 408 Minimum Requirements ...... 285 Safety ...... 388, 398 Tips...... 289 Sizes ...... 390 Trailer And Tongue Weight ...... 284 Snow Tires ...... 405 Wiring ...... 287 Spare Tire ...... 405 Trailer Towing Guide ...... 283 Spare Tires ...... 405, 406, 407 Trailer Weight ...... 283 Spinning ...... 401 Transaxle ...... 241 Trailer Towing ...... 286 Automatic ...... 241 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 402 Operation ...... 241 Wheel Nut Torque ...... 421 Transfer Case Tire Safety Information...... 388 Fluid ...... 428 Tire Service Kit ...... 338 Transmission...... 243 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...... 284 Automatic ...... 243, 386 To Open Hood ...... 87 Fluid ...... 428 Tow Hooks, Emergency ...... 359 Maintenance ...... 386 Towing ...... 281 Manual ...... 237 Disabled Vehicle ...... 357 Transporting Pets ...... 218 Guide ...... 283 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 402 INDEX 529 Turn Signals ...... 57, 60, 129 Washing Vehicle ...... 414 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...... 412 UCI Connector ...... 486 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...... 412 Uconnect Wind Buffeting ...... 83, 87 Customer Programmable Features ...... 29 Window Fogging ...... 79 Uconnect Settings ...... 29 Windows ...... 81 Uconnect Voice Command ...... 488 Close ...... 81 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 410 Down ...... 81 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector .....486 Open ...... 81 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...... 173 Power ...... 81 Up...... 81 Vanity Mirrors ...... 56 Windshield Defroster ...... 220 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...... 420 Windshield Washers ...... 63, 370 Vehicle Loading ...... 279, 395 Fluid ...... 370 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations...... 7 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 375 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 32 Windshield Wipers ...... 63 Vehicle Storage ...... 79 Wiper Blade Replacement...... 375 Viscosity, Engine Oil ...... 372 Wipers, Rain Sensitive ...... 65 Voice Recognition System (VR)...... 488, 503 12 Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 299 Warning, Roll Over ...... 4 Warnings And Cautions ...... 7 Warranty Information ...... 513 Washers, Windshield...... 63, 370

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING The antenna cable should be as short as practical and FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this only fully shielded coaxial cable. available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design normal may require special precautions. alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body ence between the communications equipment and the portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. vehicle’s electronic systems. This connection should not be fused. WARNING! Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped. Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC 2018 Compass OWNER’S MANUAL 18MP-126-AD ©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Fourth Edition Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Printed in the U.S.A.